You are on page 1of 286

5HIHUHQFH0DQXDO

0RWRUYLHZIRU$0670
6XLWH0DFKLQHU\+HDOWK70
0DQDJHU
Induction Motor Analysis Softwares

&6,3DUW5HY

&RS\ULJKW

E\&RPSXWDWLRQDO6\VWHPV,QFRUSRUDWHG

$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHG
1RSDUWRIWKLVSXEOLFDWLRQPD\EHUHSURGXFHGWUDQV
PLWWHGWUDQVFULEHGVWRUHGLQDUHWULHYDOV\VWHPRU
WUDQVODWHGLQWRDQ\ODQJXDJHLQDQ\IRUPE\DQ\PHDQV
ZLWKRXWWKHZULWWHQSHUPLVVLRQRI&RPSXWDWLRQDO6\V
WHPV,QFRUSRUDWHG &6, 

'LVFODLPHU
7KLVPDQXDOLVSURYLGHGIRULQIRUPDWLRQDOSXUSRVHV

&20387$7,21$/6<67(06,1&25325$7('0$.(612
:$55$17<2)$1<.,1':,7+5(*$5'727+,60$7(
5,$/,1&/8',1*%87127/,0,7('727+(,03/,('
:$55$17,(62)0(5&+$17$%,/,7<$1'),71(66)25$
3$57,&8/$5385326(&RPSXWDWLRQDO6\VWHPV,QFRU
SRUDWHGVKDOOQRWEHOLDEOHIRUHUURUVRPLVVLRQVRU
LQFRQVLVWHQFLHVWKDWPD\EHFRQWDLQHGKHUHLQRUIRU
LQFLGHQWDORUFRQVHTXHQWLDOGDPDJHVLQFRQQHFWLRQ
ZLWKWKHIXUQLVKLQJSHUIRUPDQFHRUXVHRIWKLVPDWH
ULDO,QIRUPDWLRQLQWKLVGRFXPHQWLVVXEMHFWWRFKDQJH
ZLWKRXWQRWLFHDQGGRHVQRWUHSUHVHQWDFRPPLWPHQW
RQWKHSDUWRI&RPSXWDWLRQDO6\VWHPV,QFRUSRUDWHG
7KHLQIRUPDWLRQLQWKLVPDQXDOLVQRWDOOLQFOXVLYHDQG
FDQQRWFRYHUDOOXQLTXHVLWXDWLRQV

3URGXFW6XSSRUW
6KRXOG\RXKDYHDQ\FRPPHQWVRQWKLVGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
RUTXHVWLRQVFRQFHUQLQJWKH$JUHHPHQWRQWKHIRO
ORZLQJSDJHVSOHDVHFRQWDFW&6,V3URGXFW6XSSRUW
'HSDUWPHQW

$GGUHVV
&RPSXWDWLRQDO6\VWHPV,QFRUSRUDWHG
,QQRYDWLRQ'ULYH
.QR[YLOOH7186$

3KRQH

8QLWHG6WDWHVDQG&DQDGD

)$;


,QWHUQHW(PDLO
8QLWHG6WDWHVDQG&DQDGDFXVWVHUY#FRPSV\VFRP

:RUOGZLGH:HE
KWWSZZZ0+0$VVHWZHEFRP

LL

&6,V5HIHUHQFH0DQXDOV
7KLVGRFXPHQWZDVZULWWHQLOOXVWUDWHGDQGSURGXFHG
E\&6,V(QJLQHHULQJ3XEOLFDWLRQV*URXSRQ3RZHU

0DFLQWRVK ZRUNVWDWLRQVXVLQJ$GREH )UDPH0DNHU 

$GREH3KRWR6KRS DQG0DFURPHGLD )UHH+DQG 

3ULQWHGFRSLHVDUHSURGXFHGXVLQJWKH;HUR[ 

'RFX7HFK SXEOLVKLQJV\VWHP

7UDGHPDUNVDQG6HUYLFHPDUNV

$FFX7UHQG&KDQJLQJWKHZD\WKHZRUOGSHUIRUPVPDLQWH
QDQFHDQG&6,ORJR&6,5%0 0H[LFR 'RFWRU.QRZ
,QIUDQDO\VLV,QIUD5RXWH/HYHOVRI$ZDUHQHVV7UDLQLQJ
0 '0DFKLQH*XDUG0DFKLQH9LHZ0DVWHU1HW0RWRU
9LHZ1VSHFWU2 0:RUNVWDWLRQ2LO9LHZ -DSDQ $06
0DFKLQHU\0DQDJHU5HOLDELOLW\%DVHG0DLQWHQDQFHDQG
ORJR5ROO9LHZ6WDUWHU7UHQG67$7867HFKQRORJLHV
7UHQG6HWWHU7ULERORJ\0LQLODE8OWUDV6SHF:$9(3$.
DQG5%0FRQVXOWDQWDUHUHJLVWHUHGWUDGHPDUNVRI&6,7HFK
QRORJLHV,QFRUSRUDWHG
&6, &KLQD-DSDQ9HQH]XHOD$XVWUDOLD &6,5%0 9HQH
]XHOD 6WDWXV&RQGLWLRQ0RQLWRU3HDN9XH5%0YLHZ
$060DFKLQHU\0DQDJHU $XVWUDOLD&KLQD-DSDQ 5%0
ZL]DUG5HOLDELOLW\%DVHG0DLQWHQDQFH 9HQH]XHOD 6RQ
LF6FDQ6RQLF9LHZ66767$7865)6PDUW6HQVRU67$786
5)7UDQVFHLYHU9HUVD%DO9LE3UR9LE9LHZDQG:HOG
ZDWFKDUHSHQGLQJWUDGHPDUNVRI&RPSXWDWLRQDO6\VWHPV
,QFRUSRUDWHG
/XEULFDQW3URILOHDQG7ULYHFWRUDUHUHJLVWHUHGVHUYLFHPDUNV
RI&RPSXWDWLRQDO6\VWHPV,QFRUSRUDWHG
5%0$060DFKLQHU\0DQDJHU &KLQD 5HOLDELOLW\%DVHG
0DLQWHQDQFH 9HQH]XHOD DQG67$7867HFKQRORJLHVDQG
GHVLJQDUHSHQGLQJVHUYLFHPDUNVRI&RPSXWDWLRQDO6\V
WHPV,QFRUSRUDWHG
$GREHLVDWUDGHPDUNDQG)UDPH0DNHUDQG3KRWR6KRSDUH
UHJLVWHUHGWUDGHPDUNVRI$GREH6\VWHPV,QF3RZHU0DF
LQWRVKLVDWUDGHPDUNRI$SSOH&RPSXWHU,QF0DFURPHGLD
LVDUHJLVWHUHGWUDGHPDUNDQG)UHH+DQGLVDWUDGHPDUNRI
0DFURPHGLD,QF;HUR[DQG'RFX7HFKDUHWUDGHPDUNVRI
;HUR[&RUSRUDWLRQ
$OORWKHUEUDQGRUSURGXFWQDPHVDUHWUDGHPDUNVRUUHJLV
WHUHGWUDGHPDUNVRIWKHLUUHVSHFWLYHFRPSDQLHV

3DWHQWV
7KHSURGXFW V GHVFULEHGLQWKLVPDQXDODUHFRYHUHG
XQGHUH[LVWLQJDQGSHQGLQJSDWHQWV

/LFHQVH$JUHHPHQW
03257$17&$5()8//<5($'$//7+(7(506$1'&21',7,2162)7+,6
$*5((0(17%()25(23(1,1*7+(3$&.$*(25352&((',1*:,7+
,167$//$7,2123(1,1*7+(3$&.$*(25&203/(7,1*7+(,167$//$
7,21,1',&$7(6<285$&&(37$1&(2)7+(7(506$1'&21',7,216
&217$,1(',17+,6$*5((0(17
,

) 28'2127$*5((727+(7(506$1'&21',7,216&217$,1(',1
7+,6$*5((0(17&$1&(/$1<,167$//$7,21$1'352037/<5(7851
7+,6352'8&7$1'7+($662&,$7(''2&80(17$7,2172&6,$1'
<285021(<:,//%(5()81'('125()81'6:,//%(*,9(1)25
352'8&76:,7+'$0$*('250,66,1*&20321(176
, <

'HILQLWLRQRI6RIWZDUH

$VXVHGKHUHLQVRIWZDUHUHIHUVWRDQ\FRPSXWHUSURJUDPFRQWDLQHGRQDQ\
PHGLXP6RIWZDUHLQFOXGHVGRZQORDGDEOHILUPZDUHIRUXVHLQGHYLFHV
VXFKDVDQDO\]HUVRU0RWRU6WDWXVXQLWVDQGLWLQFOXGHVFRPSXWHUSURJUDPV
H[HFXWDEOHRQFRPSXWHUVRUFRPSXWHUQHWZRUNV

6RIWZDUH/LFHQVH
<RXKDYHWKHQRQH[FOXVLYHULJKWWRXVHWKLVVRIWZDUHRQRQO\RQHGHYLFH
DWDWLPH<RXPD\EDFNXSWKHVRIWZDUHIRUDUFKLYDOSXUSRVHV)RUQHW
ZRUNV\VWHPV\RXKDYHWKHQRQH[FOXVLYHULJKWWRLQVWDOOWKLVVRIWZDUHRQ
RQO\RQHVHUYHU5HDGZULWHDFFHVVLVOLPLWHGWRWKHQXPEHURIOLFHQVHVSXU
FKDVHG7KHQXPEHURIUHDGRQO\DFFHVVHVLVQRWOLPLWHG

6RIWZDUH8SGDWHV
&6,DJUHHVWRSURYLGH3XUFKDVHUDWQRFKDUJHH[FHSWIRUPHGLDSUHSDUD
WLRQDQGVKLSSLQJFKDUJHVIRURQH  \HDUIURPWKHGDWHRISXUFKDVH
XSGDWHVWRWKHVRIWZDUHPDGHDWWKHVROHGLVFUHWLRQRI&6,6KRXOG3XU
FKDVHUGHVLUHWRSXUFKDVHVRIWZDUHPDLQWHQDQFHIRUWKHQH[WVXFFHHGLQJ
\HDUIROORZLQJWKHILUVW\HDUIURPWKHGDWHRISXUFKDVHDQGWKHUHDIWHURQ
DQDQQXDOEDVLVDQGLI&6,LVVWLOOSURYLGLQJPDLQWHQDQFH3XUFKDVHUPD\
SXUFKDVHWKHVDPHDQQXDOO\DWWKHH[LVWLQJUDWH

8SGDWHV8SJUDGHV

8SRQUHFHLSWRIQHZ&6,VRIWZDUHUHSODFLQJROGHU&6,VRIWZDUH\RXKDYH
GD\VWRLQVWDOODQGWHVWWKHQHZ&6,VRIWZDUHRQWKHVDPHRUDGLIIHUHQW
GHYLFH$WWKHHQGRIWKHGD\WHVWSHULRG\RXPXVWERWKUHPRYHDQG
UHWXUQWKHQHZ&6,VRIWZDUHRUUHPRYHWKHROGHU&6,VRIWZDUH

2ZQHUVKLS

7KHOLFHQVHGVRIWZDUHDQGDOOGHULYDWLYHVDUHWKHVROHSURSHUW\RI&6,7HFK
QRORJ\,QF<RXPD\QRWGLVDVVHPEOHGHFRPSLOHUHYHUVHHQJLQHHURURWK
HUZLVHWUDQVODWHWKHOLFHQVHGSURJUDP<RXPD\QRWGLVWULEXWHFRSLHVRIWKH
SURJUDPRUGRFXPHQWDWLRQLQZKROHRULQSDUWWRDQRWKHUSDUW\<RXPD\
QRWLQDQ\ZD\GLVWRUWRURWKHUZLVHPRGLI\WKHSURJUDPRUDQ\SDUWRIWKH
GRFXPHQWDWLRQZLWKRXWSULRUZULWWHQFRQVHQWIURP&6,

7UDQVIHU
<RXPD\WUDQVIHUWKHVRIWZDUHDQGOLFHQVHWRDQRWKHUSDUW\RQO\ZLWKWKH
ZULWWHQFRQVHQWRI&6,DQGRQO\LIWKHRWKHUSDUW\DJUHHVWRDFFHSWWKHWHUPV
DQGFRQGLWLRQVRIWKLV$JUHHPHQW,I\RXWUDQVIHUWKHSURJUDP\RXPXVW
WUDQVIHUWKHGRFXPHQWDWLRQDQGDQ\EDFNXSFRSLHVRUWUDQVIHURQO\WKH
GRFXPHQWDWLRQDQGGHVWUR\DQ\EDFNXSFRSLHV

&RS\ULJKW

7KHVRIWZDUHDQGGRFXPHQWDWLRQDUHFRS\ULJKWHG$OOULJKWVDUHUHVHUYHG

7HUPLQDWLRQ

,I\RXFRPPLWDPDWHULDOEUHDFKRIWKLV$JUHHPHQW&6,PD\WHUPLQDWHWKH
$JUHHPHQWE\ZULWWHQQRWLFH

9LUXV'LVFODLPHU
&6,XVHVWKHODWHVWYLUXVFKHFNLQJWHFKQRORJLHVWRWHVWDOOLWVVRIWZDUH+RZ
HYHUVLQFHQRDQWLYLUXVV\VWHPLVUHOLDEOHZHVWURQJO\DGYLVHWKDW
\RXXVHDQGDQWLYLUXVV\VWHPLQZKLFKKDYHFRQILGHQFHWRYHULI\WKHVRIW
ZDUHLVYLUXVIUHH&6,PDNHVQRUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVRUZDUUDQWLHVWRWKHHIIHFW
WKDWWKHOLFHQVHGVRIWZDUHLVYLUXVIUHH

12:$55$17<
7+(352*5$0,63529,'('$6,6:,7+287$1<:$55$17,(6(;35(66
25,03/,(',1&/8',1*%87127/,0,7('72$1<:$55$17,(6250(5
&+$17$%,/,7<25),71(66)25$3$57,&8/$5385326(

/,0,7$7,212)/,$%,/,7<$1'5(0(',(6

112(9(17:,//&6,%(/,$%/(72<2825$1<7+,5'
$57<)25$1<'$0$*(6,1&/8',1*$1</267352),76
/2676$9,1*62527+(5,1&,'(17$/25&216(48(1
7,$/'$0$*(6$5,6,1*2872)7+(86(257+(
,1$%,/,7<7286(7+,6352*5$07+(/,&(16((
662/(
$1'(;&/86,9(5(0('<,17+((9(172)$'()(&7,1
:25.0$16+,3250$7(5,$/,6(;35(66/</,0,7('727+(
5(3/$&(0(172)7+(',6.(77(6,112(9(17:,//&6,
6
/,$%,/,7<(;&(('7+(385&+$6(35,&(2)7+(352'8&7
,

([SRUW5HVWULFWLRQV

<RXDJUHHWRFRPSO\IXOO\ZLWKDOOODZVUHJXODWLRQVGHFUHHVDQGRUGHUVRI
WKH8QLWHV6WDWHVRI$PHULFDWKDWUHVWULFWRUSURKLELWWKHH[SRUWDWLRQ RU
UHH[SRUWDWLRQ RIWHFKQLFDOGDWDDQGRUWKHGLUHFWSURGXFWRILWWRRWKHU
FRXQWULHVLQFOXGLQJZLWKRXWOLPLWDWLRQWKH86([SRUW$GPLQLVWUDWLRQ
5HJXODWLRQV

86*RYHUQPHQW5LJKWV
7KHSURJUDPVDQGUHODWHGPDWHULDOVDUHSURYLGHGZLWK5(675,&7('
5,*+768VHGXSOLFDWLRQRUGLVFORVXUHE\WKH86*RYHUQPHQWLVVXE
MHFWWRUHVWULFWLRQVVHWIRUWKLQWKH)HGHUDO$FTXLVLWLRQ5HJXODWLRQVDQGLWV
6XSSOHPHQWV

LLL

+DUGZDUH7HFKQLFDO+HOS
3OHDVHKDYHWKHQXPEHURIWKHFXUUHQWYHUVLRQRI

6RIWZDUH7HFKQLFDO+HOS
3OHDVHKDYHWKHQXPEHURIWKHFXUUHQWYHUVLRQRI

\RXUILUPZDUHUHDG\ZKHQ\RXFDOO7KHYHUVLRQ

\RXUVRIWZDUHUHDG\ZKHQ\RXFDOO7KHYHUVLRQ

RIWKHILUPZDUHLQ&6,V0RGHOVHULHV0RGHO

QXPEHUIRUVRIWZDUHRSHUDWLQJXQGHU06'26

DQGRWKHUDQDO\]HUVDSSHDUVRQWKHSRZHU

DSSHDUVDWWKHWRSRIHYHU\PHQXVFUHHQ7KH

XSVFUHHQWKDWLVGLVSOD\HGZKHQWKHDQDO\]HULV

YHUVLRQQXPEHUIRUVRIWZDUHRSHUDWLQJXQGHU

WXUQHGRQ

:LQGRZV

,I\RXKDYHDSUREOHPH[SODLQWKHH[DFWQDWXUHRI
\RXUSUREOHP)RUH[DPSOHZKDWDUHWKHHUURU
PHVVDJHV":KHQGRWKH\RFFXU".QRZZKDW\RX

LVGLVSOD\HGE\VHOHFWLQJ$ERXWXQGHU

WKH+HOSPHQXEDULWHP
,I\RXKDYHDSUREOHPH[SODLQWKHH[DFWQDWXUHRI
\RXUSUREOHP)RUH[DPSOHZKDWDUHWKHHUURU

H[DPSOHZKDWPRGHZHUH\RXLQ":KDWVWHSVGLG

PHVVDJHV" ,ISRVVLEOHPDNHDSULQWRXWRIWKHHUURU
PHVVDJH :KHQGRWKH\RFFXU".QRZZKDW\RX

\RXJRWKURXJK"7U\WRGHWHUPLQHEHIRUH\RXFDOO

ZHUHGRLQJZKHQWKHSUREOHPRFFXUUHG)RU

ZKHWKHUWKHSUREOHPLVUHSHDWDEOH

H[DPSOHZKDWPRGHZHUH\RXLQ":KDWVWHSVGLG

ZHUHGRLQJZKHQWKHSUREOHPRFFXUUHG)RU

+DUGZDUH5HSDLU
&6,UHSDLUVDQGXSGDWHVLWVKDUGZDUHSURGXFWVIUHHIRU
RQH\HDUIURPWKHGDWHRISXUFKDVH7KLVVHUYLFHZDU
UDQW\LQFOXGHVKDUGZDUHLPSURYHPHQWPRGLILFDWLRQ
FRUUHFWLRQUHFDOLEUDWLRQXSGDWHDQGPDLQWHQDQFHIRU
QRUPDOZHDU7KLVVHUYLFHZDUUDQW\H[FOXGHVUHSDLURI
GDPDJHIURPPLVXVHDEXVHQHJOHFWFDUHOHVVQHVVRU
PRGLILFDWLRQSHUIRUPHGE\DQ\RQHRWKHUWKDQ&6,
$IWHUWKHRQH\HDUVHUYLFHZDUUDQW\H[SLUHVHDFKUHWXUQ
RID&6,KDUGZDUHSURGXFWLVVXEMHFWWRDPLQLPXPVHU
YLFHIHH,IWKHFRVWRIUHSDLUH[FHHGVWKLVPLQLPXPIHH
ZHZLOOFDOO\RXZLWKDQHVWLPDWHEHIRUHSHUIRUPLQJDQ\

\RXJRWKURXJK"7U\WRGHWHUPLQHEHIRUH\RXFDOO
ZKHWKHUWKHSUREOHPLVUHSHDWDEOH
3OHDVHEHDW\RXUFRPSXWHUZKHQ\RXFDOO:HFDQ
VHUYH\RXEHWWHUZKHQZHFDQZRUNWKURXJKWKH
SUREOHPWRJHWKHU

6RIWZDUH7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUW
&6,SURYLGHVWHFKQLFDOVXSSRUWWKURXJKWKHIROORZLQJ
IRUWKRVHXQGHUPDLQWHQDQFHFRQWUDFWV
7HOHSKRQHDVVLVWDQFHDQGFRPPXQLFDWLRQYLDWKH
,QWHUQHW
0DVVXSGDWHVWKDWDUHUHOHDVHGGXULQJWKDWWLPH

ZRUN&RQWDFW&6,V3URGXFW6XSSRUW'HSDUWPHQWIRU

,QWHULPXSGDWHVXSRQUHTXHVW3OHDVHFRQWDFW&6,

LQIRUPDWLRQFRQFHUQLQJWKHFXUUHQWUDWHV

&XVWRPHU6HUYLFHVIRUPRUHLQIRUPDWLRQ

2EVROHWH+DUGZDUH
$OWKRXJK&6,ZLOOKRQRUDOOFRQWUDFWXDODJUHHPHQWVDQG

5HWXUQLQJ,WHPV
&DOO3URGXFW6XSSRUW VHHSDJH WRREWDLQDUHWXUQ

ZLOOPDNHHYHU\HIIRUWWRHQVXUHWKDWLWVVRIWZDUHSDFN

DXWKRUL]DWLRQQXPEHU3OHDVHZULWHLWFOHDUO\DQG

DJHVDUHEDFNZDUGFRPSDWLEOHWRWDNHDGYDQWDJHRI

SURPLQHQWO\RQWKHRXWVLGHRIWKHVKLSSLQJ

DGYDQFHVLQQHZHUKDUGZDUHSODWIRUPVDQGWRNHHSRXU
SURJUDPVUHDVRQDEO\VPDOO&6,UHVHUYHVWKHULJKWWRGLV
FRQWLQXHVXSSRUWIRUROGRURXWRIGDWHKDUGZDUHLWHPV

FRQWDLQHU
,IUHWXUQLQJIRUFUHGLWUHWXUQDOODFFHVVRULHV
RULJLQDOO\VKLSSHGZLWKWKHLWHP V ,QFOXGHFDEOHV
VRIWZDUHGLVNHWWHVPDQXDOVHWF
(QFORVHDQRWHWKDWGHVFULEHVWKHUHDVRQ V \RXDUH
UHWXUQLQJWKHLWHP V 
,QVXUH\RXUSDFNDJHIRUUHWXUQVKLSPHQW6KLSSLQJ
FRVWVDQGDQ\ORVVHVGXULQJVKLSPHQWDUH\RXU
UHVSRQVLELOLW\&2'SDFNDJHVFDQQRWEHDFFHSWHG
DQGZLOOEHUHWXUQHGXQRSHQHG

LY

&(1RWLFH
&6,SURGXFWVEHDULQJWKH
V\PERORQWKHSURGXFW
RULQWKHXVHUVPDQXDODUHLQFRPSOLDQFHZLWKDSSOLFDEOH
(0&DQG6DIHW\'LUHFWLYHVRIWKH(XURSHDQ8QLRQ,Q
DFFRUGDQFHZLWK&(1(/(&VWDQGDUG(1QRUPDO
LQWHQGHGRSHUDWLRQLVVSHFLILHGDVIROORZV
 7KHSURGXFWPXVWQRWSRVHDVDIHW\KD]DUG
 7KHSURGXFWPXVWQRWVXVWDLQGDPDJHDVDUHVXOWRI
XVHXQGHUHQYLURQPHQWDOFRQGLWLRQVVSHFLILHGLQ
WKHXVHUGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
 7KHSURGXFWPXVWVWD\LQRUGHIDXOWWRDQRSHUDWLQJ
PRGHWKDWLVUHVWRUDEOHE\WKHXVHU
 7KHSURGXFWPXVWQRWORVHSURJUDPPHPRU\XVHU
FRQILJXUHGPHPRU\ HJURXWHV RUSUHYLRXVO\
VWRUHGGDWDPHPRU\:KHQDSSDUHQWWKHXVHUPD\
QHHGWRLQLWLDWHDUHVHWDQGRUUHVWDUWRIDGDWD
DFTXLVLWLRQLQSURJUHVV
$'HFODUDWLRQRI&RQIRUPLW\FHUWLILFDWHIRUWKHSURGXFW
LVRQILOHDWWKHDSSURSULDWH&6,RIILFHZLWKLQWKH(XUR
SHDQ&RPPXQLW\

YL

&RQWHQWV
&KDSWHU ,QWURGXFWLRQWR0RWRU9LHZ
Guidelines for Success When Using MotorView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Structure of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Using This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Proactive Motor Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Detecting and Analyzing Electrical Motor Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

&KDSWHU &UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Using RBMwizard to Create Motor Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Using the FRQCAL Program to Enter Motor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Store Motor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Setting Up Your Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Using MotorViews Automatic DBASE Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Setting up the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Saving Spectra and Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Manually Selecting Analysis Parameter Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Rotor Bar Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Flux Coil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Adding or Editing Motor Measurement Points with DBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Fault Frequency Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

&KDSWHU &RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV
Defining MotorView Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

YLL

Plotting a Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


Motor Option Function Bar Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Set RPM Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Calibration Function Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Posting Alarms and Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

&KDSWHU 8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV


Selecting Motor Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
MotorView Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Setting Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Analysis Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Axis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Alarm Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Waveform Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Variable Frequency Motor Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Performing Rotor Bar Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Displaying Spectra and Analyses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Results of Rotor Bar Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Communicating Results to RBMview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Quick Evaluation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Trend Evaluation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Parameter Profile Evaluation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

&KDSWHU )OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\


Measurement Location and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Magnetic Flux Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Rotor Bar Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Low Frequency Flux Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
High Frequency Flux Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Selecting Motor Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
MotorView Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Setting Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Flux Coil Analysis Options Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Waveform Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

YLLL

Flux Analysis on Variable Frequency Motors (VFM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36


Performing Flux Coil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Low Frequency Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Displaying Spectra and Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Low Frequency Flux Spectral Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Communicating Results to RBMview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Quick Evaluation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Communicating Results to RBMview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Trend Evaluation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Communicating Results to RBMview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Parameter Profile Evaluation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
High Frequency Flux Coil Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Communicating Results to RBMview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Quick Evaluation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Communicating Results to RBMview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
High Frequency Trend Evaluation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Communicating Results to RBMview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Parameter Profile Evaluation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

&KDSWHU 7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\


Temperature Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Temperature Monitoring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Selecting Thermal/Electrical Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Thermal/Electrical Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
MotorView Alarm Thresholds - an Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Performing Thermal/Electrical Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Communicating Results to RBMview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Trend Displays of Thermal/Electrical Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

&KDSWHU 6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\


Types of Bearing Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Common Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Shaft Probe Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Shaft Probe Connection and Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Selecting Motor Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
MotorView Global Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

L[

Setting Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13


Shaft Voltage/Current Options Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Shaft Voltage/Current Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicating Results to AMS Machinery Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Evaluation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-16
7-22
7-23
7-25
7-25

Trend Evaluation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

$SSHQGL[$ $XWRPDWLF7HPSHUDWXUH'DWD$FTXLVLWLRQ
Automatic Temperature Data Collection With a 515 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Automatic Temperature Data Collection With a 510 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Automatic Temperature Data Collection With a 505 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Analog Temperature Data Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

$SSHQGL[% )OX[$QDO\VLV4XLFN5HIHUHQFH*XLGH
Explanation of Sample Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

$SSHQGL[& 6KDIW3UREH0HDVXUHPHQWVDQG$FTXLVLWLRQ
Defining Points and Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Making Connections and Attaching Shaft Probe to Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . C-4
Suggestions for Making Shaft Current/Voltage Measurements. . . . . . . . C-4

5HIHUHQFHV
*ORVVDU\
,QGH[

&KDSWHU 

,QWURGXFWLRQWR0RWRU9LHZ

,QVWDOOLQJDQG6WDUWLQJWKH3URJUDP
,QVWDOODWLRQ

The MotorView software can be purchased as a stand-alone application or as part


of the AMS Suite: Machinery Health Manager group of applications. In either
case, refer to the AMS Machinery Manager Installation and Administration Manual for
instructions about installing or enabling the MotorView software.



6WDUWLQJWKH3URJUDP

After installation, select the Motor technology button on the left side of the AMS
Machinery Manager main menu. The MotorView Analysis icon appears on the
Analysis tab. Double click the icon to start the program. For more information
about the AMS Machinery Manager main menu, see the AMS Machinery Manager
Reference Manual.




,QWURGXFWLRQWR0RWRU9LHZ

*XLGHOLQHVIRU6XFFHVV:KHQ8VLQJ0RWRU9LHZ
MotorView II is designed to automate the analysis of electric current, flux, temperature, and shaft probe data. Much of this data is applied as a new technology, therefore, certain procedures must be used to ensure smooth and easy operation of the
program. Mandatory requirements for analyzing rotor and stator related conditions are listed below along with an outline for setup and analysis procedures.
0DQGDWRU\5HTXLUHPHQWV

1. . . Measurement point IDs must follow the convention outlined in this manual
(see Fig. 2-3, Measurement Point IDs for Motor Analysis on page 2-27) and
the appropriate measurement point types must be used.
2. . . All electric current and flux points must have either a MTRC fault frequency
or an equipment configuration with a specific motor assigned. For
information about defining a fault frequency, see Fault Frequency Setup
on page 2-34.
3. . . Flux measurements must be acquired from the same location and without
excessive vibration of the flux coil sensor.
2XWOLQHIRUDVXFFHVVIXO0RWRU9LHZSURJUDP

1. . . Create a User Warehouse File containing nameplate data of the motors to


be analyzed.
2. . . Create measurement points using the automatic measurement setup
program Setup DBASE, available with MotorView. AMS Machinery
Managers RBMwizard can also be used to configure points for the motor
technology.
3. . . Mark measurement locations for repeatable temperature and flux
measurements.
4. . . For the first measurement period only, acquire electric current
measurements for baseline purposes.
5. . . Calibrate the electric current measurement.

*XLGHOLQHVIRU6XFFHVV:KHQ8VLQJ0RWRU9LHZ



1RWH

You do not need to calibrate flux measurements.


6. . . At least on the first analysis period, analyze the flux measurements using the
Flux Coil Analysis option found under the Motor Analysis Options
menu. Make sure the Save any Modified RPM? flag is set to YES (in the
Globals menu) to ensure that the speed found by MotorView II is saved for
the low frequency flux spectrum.
1RWH

Step 6 is mandatory in order to perform high frequency flux analysis.


Before using MotorView, please read the warning about using CSI clamp-on current transformers that appears below.
:DUQLQJ

The voltage rating on the clamp-on current transformers distributed


by CSI is 600 volts. Therefore, CSI does not recommend that you use
these current transformers on conductors carrying more than 600
volts. If your application has more than 600 volts, CSI recommends that
you monitor currents off the secondary side of a permanently installed
current transformer.



,QWURGXFWLRQWR0RWRU9LHZ

2YHUYLHZ
0RWRU9LHZ3DFNDJHV

MotorView is available in either of the following packages:


MotorView I provides electric current rotor bar analysis.
MotorView II provides electric current, temperature, and flux coil signal
analysis (this package is added to MotorView I). Shaft current/voltage analysis is also available for use with the optional 348SP Shaft Probe.
1RWH

All options of MotorView I apply to MotorView II


MotorView I is a subset of MotorView II
3UHUHTXLVLWHV

MotorView is normally used with AMS Machinery Manager software and uses AMS
Machinery Manager programs and databases for storing and retrieving data, creating displays, and producing reports. AMS Machinery Manager manuals (as well
as this manual) are written with the assumption that you are familiar with the basic
operation of the host computer and Microsoft Windows software.
If you are unfamiliar with the computer, peripheral hardware, or Microsoft Windows conventions, CSI strongly recommends review of the appropriate documentation before using the AMS Machinery Manager and MotorView software.

6WUXFWXUHRIWKH0DQXDO
This manual is written in the following manner. The first sections cover both MotorView I and MotorView II descriptions and operating functionality. The last sections
are devoted to MotorView II descriptions and operations. Actual contents of the
individual chapters are as follows:
Chapter 1 applies to both MotorView I and MotorView II. Provides an
overview of proactive motor monitoring, general detection and analyzing
functions, software installation procedures, and general conventions used in
writing this manual.

2YHUYLHZ



Chapter 2 most of this chapter also applies to both MotorView I and


MotorView II. Provides an overview of how to create motor measurement
points either manually or automatically. Also discusses data collection and
saving spectra and waveforms.
Chapter 3 discusses defining of Global Parameters, and describes spectral
display functions that are common to both MotorView I and MotorView II.
Chapter 4 explains how to use the MotorView program including analysis
and display choices. Other discussions include using a current clamp to collect electric current data, performing rotor bar analysis, evaluating results,
and plotting a current spectrum.
Chapter 5 explains how to use the flux coil analysis (MotorView II) option.
Chapter 6 explains how to use the thermal/electrical analysis (MotorView
II) option.
Chapter 7 - explains how to use the shaft probe analysis (MotorView II)
option.
References - contains a list of references pertaining to electric motor analysis.
Appendix A - explains how to acquire temperature data automatically using
a temperature probe.
Appendix B - presents a table summarizing the results of CSI motor testing
using the flux coil.
Appendix C - gives information about how to connect and use the CSI Shaft
Probe for shaft current/voltage measurements.

8VLQJ7KLV0DQXDO
6SHFLDO(PSKDVLV

These conventions are used throughout this manual to call attention to the adjacent text:
1RWH

A note indicates special comments or instructions.



,QWURGXFWLRQWR0RWRU9LHZ

&DXWLRQ

A caution indicates actions that may have a major impact on the software,
database files, etc.

:DUQLQJ

A warning indicates action that could create an extremely hazardous


condition for equipment or personnel.
5HIHUHQFHV

Throughout this manual references are made to texts, articles, and other
outside sources of information about electric motor analysis. The citations
in the text are surrounded by brackets [ ], with the corresponding references found in the References. section following Chapter 7.

2YHUYLHZ



3URDFWLYH0RWRU0RQLWRULQJ
Proactive motor monitoring methods can be employed to avoid premature failures
as well as provide additional sensitivity to electrically-generated faults. The following
four beneficial measurements are included in the MotorView II package:
Electric current an effective proven technology for detecting faults related
to rotor bars.
Temperature abnormal temperatures can point to several potential problems such as (1) overheating due to poor air flow or unbalanced voltage (2)
bearing failure and (3) degradation in the rotor or stator.
Flux a flux coil is employed to capture flux signals. This provides an electrical quality signature which is sensitive to conditions that alter the electrical characteristics of the motor (broken rotor bars, eccentricity, imbalance
between phases, and stator faults).
Shaft Current/Voltage these signals are acquired using a shaft probe.
Parameters measured are current, voltage, and peak voltage. High currents
(voltages) on shafts are the root cause of bearing failures resulting from
fluting.
In a typical application, measurement points, alarm limit sets, and analysis parameter sets are assigned to a motor either automatically (via the MotorView Setup
DBASE option), manually (through AMS Machinery Managers DBASE program), or using AMS Machinery Managers RBMwizard.
1RWH

If RBMwizard is not used to configure a motor, a fault frequency set


corresponding to that motor must be assigned to electric current and
flux measurement points. A route can then be constructed and measurements collected and trended on a monthly basis.



,QWURGXFWLRQWR0RWRU9LHZ

MotorView software has the ability to take the acquired data and create special
trend and comparison parameters which indicate the status of the rotor and stator
for an AC induction motor. Rotor bar conditions are predicted through analysis of
electric current and/or flux coil data. Stator degradation can be detected (using
flux coil data) via a special comparison between the data in question and a reference set of data. Comparisons are performed on a low frequency, high resolution
spectrum as well as a high frequency (slot pass) spectrum. Significant increases in
particular peaks from these spectra indicate stator degradation and other electrical
anomalies.
In addition, temperature (normalized with the ambient air and load of the motor)
is trended for two reasons: (1) to proactively indicate excessive heat which will
shorten the life of the motor and (2) to indicate faults related to bearings, couplings, and electrical connections. The program will flag significant temperature
increases and provide recommended actions.
If you have a CSI Model 348SP Shaft Probe, shaft current/voltage analysis can also
be performed. The MotorView II software can display the spectra of both shaft current and voltage measurements as well as display parameters specific to shaft probe
measurements. Parameters outside the limits will cause alarms indicating the need
for action.

3URDFWLYH0RWRU0RQLWRULQJ



'HWHFWLQJDQG$QDO\]LQJ(OHFWULFDO0RWRU)DXOWV
6\VWHP5HTXLUHPHQWV
The hardware and software required to perform motor electrical fault detection in
a RBM/PDM system includes:
The MotorView Induction Motor Analysis program and AMS Machinery
Manager PDM software installed on a PC-compatible computer;
Model 21xx Series Machinery Analyzer; and
Model 341 Series Clamp-on Current Transformer (with appropriate voltage
adapter).
Model 343 Flux Coil w/342-C cable (for MotorView II only).
Model 505, 510, or 515 Temperature Scanner with appropriate cable (for
MotorView II only) or some other means of acquiring temperature data.
For shaft current and voltage analysis: the Model 348SP Shaft Probe, the
348C1 Communications Cable, and the 348G1 Ground Cable.



,QWURGXFWLRQWR0RWRU9LHZ

'LVFODLPHU
This program aids you in evaluating the electrical condition of AC induction
motors. Because of the complexities of real world problems, there are no claims or
guarantees that the program will correctly predict all of the problems encountered.
You are strongly cautioned against blindly accepting the conclusions produced by
the software. All results must be considered as advisory information only and
should be weighed carefully by the personnel who are responsible for the actions
taken. CSI does not accept any liability with regard to the actions performed or
omitted by those using this program. The user is responsible for the safety of personnel and equipment.

'LVFODLPHU





,QWURGXFWLRQWR0RWRU9LHZ

&KDSWHU 

&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

*HQHUDO,QWURGXFWLRQ
MotorView software (and text in this manual) is designed and written to fit a variety
of needs:
For standalone users or, as a part of the AMS Machinery Manager software
package.
For experienced AMS Machinery Manager users thoroughly familiar with
database structure or entirely new users.
For users who already have databases established (and want to add proactive
electric motor monitoring points) or, those who want to create entirely new
databases for just this purpose.
Refer to the AMS Machinery Manager Reference Manual (DBASE chapter) or the
RBMwizard Users Manual for more information on database structure (summarized below):
Database contains one or more Areas
Area groups together one or more pieces of Equipment
Equipment contains one or more Measurement Points
Measurement point the actual point where data will be taken
Refer to the AMS Machinery Manager Reference Manual (Overview chapter) for conceptual information about:
Analysis Parameter Sets
Alarm Limit Sets
Fault Frequencies
Equipment Configurations
Creating Routes (and how to use CSI Model 21xx data collectors to collect
data from the measurement points and transfer the data to a database)



This manual assumes that you are familiar with these concepts through prior experience, referencing AMS Machinery Manager manuals, or attending CSI training
classes. Because of this, the following topics are covered briefly, without a lot of
detailed discussion.
AMS Machinery Managers Frequency Calculation (FRQCAL) program
which allows you to enter information from the nameplate of an electric
motor into a User Component Warehouse file.
How motor information (on the motor you plan to monitor) that has been
entered into a User Component Warehouse file is assigned to either an
existing database or, a newly created database shell.
Creating MotorView proactive motor monitoring measurement points in
one of several ways:
(a) by using MotorViews Setup DBASE function to automatically create Areas, Equipment, and Measurement Points (along with
associated Analysis Parameter Sets, Alarm Limit Sets, and Fault Frequency Sets) in new or existing Areas and equipment or
(b) by using AMS Machinery Managers DBASE program to manually create Areas, Equipment, and Measurement Points (along with
associated Analysis Parameter Sets, Alarm Limit Sets, and Fault Frequency Sets).
(b) by using AMS Machinery Managers RBMwizard program to
automatically create measurement points with associated Analysis
Parameter Sets, Alarm Limit Sets, and Equipment Configurations.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

2YHUYLHZ
In order to use MotorView to analyze motor electrical conditions, associated measurement points must be established. You can do this by entering motor data information through the FRQCAL program in AMS Machinery Manager, developing
an empty, shell database in AMS Machinery Managers DBASE program, and automatically creating proactive motor monitoring measurement points by using
MotorViews Setup DBASE menu. This program develops the necessary analysis
parameter sets, alarm limit sets, and fault frequency sets and ties them to the appropriate measurement point.
Another method is to use AMS Machinery Managers RBMwizard to create motor
measurement points. RBMwizard allows you to enter the motor specific information and then automatically create the measurement points for the motor technology.
This chapter describes requirements for creating these proactive motor monitoring measurement points. The following flowchart shows the basic steps for these
two different approaches:

&UHDWLQJ0RWRU9LHZ3URDFWLYH0RQLWRULQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWV

2YHUYLHZ



8VLQJ5%0ZL]DUGWR&UHDWH0RWRU3RLQWV
Using the RBMwizard program is the most automated method to create proactive
motor measurement points. This method significantly reduces the number of programs and steps required. RBMwizard can be used to create an entire database,
including the measurement points of interest and the associated equipment configuration information. The main difference in this method is that the motor specific information is stored in an Equipment Configuration rather than in a User
Component Warehouse file that is referenced by a fault frequency.
If this method is used, it is important to first define and configure a motor using
RBMwizards Component Design Studio (CDS). Accurate analysis requires that
you enter as much information about the motor as possible, especially the motors
rated speed and full load amps.
It is also essential that you select the Motor Technology button on the bottom CDS
tool bar to create proactive motor analysis points. CDS defaults to Vibration Technology. Clicking the Motor Technology button allows you to create motor technology points such as flux and shaft probe points.

5%0ZL]DUG&RPSRQHQW'HVLJQ6WXGLR0RWRU7HFKQRORJ\%XWWRQ



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

8VLQJWKH)54&$/3URJUDPWR(QWHU0RWRU,QIRUPDWLRQ
If you are not using RBMwizard to set up motor monitoring points, MotorView
must be supplied with motor nameplate information through the Motor Frequencies function of AMS Machinery Managers Frequency Calculation (FRQCAL)
program. The Motor Frequencies function uses nameplate and design information to calculate characteristic frequencies associated with electric motor analysis.
The following variables are the minimum requirement in order to add the necessary information to the User Component Warehouse File for use with MotorView.
For information concerning additional variables, and how to store and recall fault
frequency files, see the FRQCAL chapter of the AMS Machinery Manager VibView
Reference Manual.
Start the FRQCAL program. After accepting the disclaimer screen, select Motor
Frequencies; the screen on the next page is then displayed.

8VLQJWKH)54&$/3URJUDPWR(QWHU0RWRU,QIRUPDWLRQ



0RWRU)UHTXHQF\'DWD

Motor Manufacturer: - Enter a name (up to three-characters) for the manufacturer of the motor. This name will be used to help you locate the motor in the User
Component Warehouse file after it is stored. A list of abbreviations for many motor
manufacturers is available by clicking on the Help icon or selecting Help from the
Tool bar.
Motor Identification: - Enter the manufacturers ID for this motor. This field may
contain up to 12 characters, and is used to help you locate the stored motor information. If no model number is available, CSI has designated that the first six digits
of the ID are to be the first six digits of the frame size. The next four ID digits are
the first four digits of the horsepower and the last two digits are the number of
poles. All three sectors of the ID number are left justified with spaces occupying
non-designated digits if necessary. Dashes in the original frame number are
omitted for the motors ID. If the frame size is not known or does not exist, then the
designated frame ID is LRGUNK for motors more than 500 HP and UNK for
motors less than 500 HP.
1RWH

For European motors, the Type may be used as the ID number.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

Motor Frame Size: Enter the motor frame size from the motor nameplate. If the
frame size is unknown or does not exist, then select LRGUNK for motors larger
than 500 HP and UNK for motors smaller than 500 HP. Dashes on the original
frame number are omitted.
Motor Type: Select either AC Induction, AC Synchronous, DC, AC Variable Frequency, Hydraulic, Other, or Unknown.
1RWH

MotorView will not evaluate DC or Hydraulic motors. Also, you must


select the AC Variable Frequency option in order to analyze motors
running at other than 50 or 60 Hz.
Speed Of Motor in RPM: Enter the motor speed in rotations per minute (or per
second).
Units for Frequency: Select either Hz, CPM, or Orders.
Line Frequency: Enter the line frequency which feeds the motor (this value should
be stamped on the nameplate).
0RWRU&RQVWUXFWLRQ

8VLQJWKH)54&$/3URJUDPWR(QWHU0RWRU,QIRUPDWLRQ



Number of Phases: Enter the number of phases in the motor from the nameplate
(this is the number of phases used to run the motor typically one or three).
Number of Poles: - This number signifies the stator coil configuration, referring to
magnetic poles. For an induction motor:

Number of Rotor Bars: - Enter the number of rotor bars. This information can be
obtained from the manufacturer of the motor. If the number of rotor bars is
unknown, enter 0 for this parameter and 0 for the stator slot parameter.
Number of Stator Slots: - Enter the number of stator slots. This information can
be obtained from the manufacturer of the motor. If the number is unknown, enter
0 for this parameter.
1RWH

If the number of rotor bars is unknown, entering 0 for the number of


rotor bars will allow MotorView to give an estimation of broken bars
(in percent).



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

1DPH3ODWH5DWLQJ

Rated RPM: - Enter the rated RPM of the motor found on the motors nameplate.
Horsepower: Enter the horsepower of the motor found on the motors nameplate.
Voltage: Enter the voltage of the motor found on the motors nameplate.
Current (Amps): - Enter the specified current rating in amps found on the nameplate. (Also referred to as full-load amps or FLA.)
1RWH

For multivoltage motors when the nameplate has more than one
set of voltage and current information, enter the values corresponding to the voltage you are supplying to the motor in your application.

8VLQJWKH)54&$/3URJUDPWR(QWHU0RWRU,QIRUPDWLRQ



6WRUH0RWRU,QIRUPDWLRQ
6WRUH0RWRU

Selecting the Store Motor function bar key (also available from the Tools pulldown
menu) will store the information that has been entered on the Motor Frequency
Data menu in the User Component Warehouse file.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

6HWWLQJ8S<RXU'DWDEDVH
Proactive motor monitoring points (for each piece of equipment to be analyzed)
are established by creating Areas, Equipment, Analysis Parameter Sets, and Measurement Points using RBMwizard, the Database Setup (DBASE) program, or
MotorViews Setup DBASE menu option.
However, the Setup DBASE option requires that a database shell has already been
created. This shell, which contains the database global parameters, can be created
by RBMwizard or the Database Setup program. See the RBMwizard Users Manual
and the AMS Machinery Manager Reference Manual for information about setting up
the database shell.
1RWH

MasterTrend users will find some differences in the AMS Machinery


Manager database structure which affect motor analysis. For motor
analysis, the main change between MasterTrend and AMS
Machinery Manager in the databases global information is the addition of separate unit modes and dB reference values for current, flux,
shaft current, and shaft voltage measurements. In MasterTrend,
these measurement types were collectively referred to as general
dynamic readings. In addition, the only file from which user-defined
motor information can be retrieved is the User Component Warehouse file. This file is specified in the global parameters.
If you are not using RBMwizard, then CSI recommends that you use MotorViews
Setup DBASE function to automatically create measurement points, analysis
parameter sets, and alarm limit sets (see Using MotorViews Automatic DBASE
Setup on page 2-12 for more information).

6HWWLQJ8S<RXU'DWDEDVH



8VLQJ0RWRU9LHZV$XWRPDWLF'%$6(6HWXS
To save a tremendous amount of work, use MotorViews Setup DBASE function
to automatically create measurement points, analysis parameter sets, and alarm
limit sets. After creating a database shell in AMS Machinery Managers DBASE, the
Areas, equipment, and measurement points can be created automatically in the
MotorView program.
1RWH

With this procedure, measurement points and analysis parameter


sets are created automatically for use in a proactive motor monitoring
program.

1RWH

Measurement points cannot be altered through MotorViews setup


DBASE. They can only be created. To change settings of a measurement point, go to AMS Machinery Managers DBASE program.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

3URDFWLYH0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQW'HILQLWLRQ

The chart below shows the different types of proactive measurement points that
MotorView automatically creates for you, using the Setup DBASE function. It also
shows the different characteristics for each point which will be set up on the individual measurement points.
0HDVXUHPHQW7\SH
7HPSHUDWXUH
7""

)OX[
)""

8QLW7\SH
&RGH

.H\SDG,QSXW
7HPSHUDWXUH

8QLWV

&HOVLXVRU
)DKUHQKHLW
6WDQGDUG

6HQVRU
6HQVLWLYLW\
9(8

5RWRU%DU
5%"

2EVHUYDWLRQV
&OHDQOLQHVV
$LU)ORZ 
2""

6KDIW
3UREH
6+&6+9

)OX[/RZ *HQHUDO'\QDPLF
)OX[+LJK RU
&XUUHQW

.H\SDG,QSXW

6KDIW&XUUHQWRU
6KDIW9ROWDJH

)OX[$X

$PSV

&OHDQ$LU
)ORZ

P$PSV
RU
9ROWV

&DQG) 

 
 

 
$ 
%&' 


'&2IIVHWLQ
9ROWV











6HQVRU
9DOLGLW\/LPLW
5DQJH

/RZ )
+LJK )

/RZ
+LJK

/RZ [)/$ 
+LJK [)/$



/RZ
+LJK

)LJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWV&UHDWHG8VLQJWKH6HWXS'%$6()XQFWLRQ

6HWWLQJXSWKH'DWDEDVH
With MotorView running and the Motor Analysis Options menu open, select
Setup DBASE on the Function Bar to display the database tree. Select an Area
and click the Add Equipment button to display the Define Equipment Information menu.

8VLQJ0RWRU9LHZV$XWRPDWLF'%$6(6HWXS



1RWH

The Function Bar Add Area button creates a new Area while the
Edit Area button edits an existing Area.
'HILQH(TXLSPHQW,QIRUPDWLRQ


Equipment Description: - The description may contain up to 28 characters and


should be as descriptive and unique as possible.
Equipment ID Code: - The ID code may contain up to 10 alphanumeric characters
and must be unique for each individual piece of equipment within the area.
1RWH

When collecting data on each point, the Equipment ID code and the
individual Measurement Point ID are combined to form a unique
identification code for each measurement point displayed on the
Model 21xx series machinery analyzer.
Equipment Classification: - The Equipment Classification field may contain up to
16 alphanumeric characters describing the classification of this piece of equipment. Use of this field is not mandatory and may be left blank, if desired.
Analysis Group ID No.: - An analysis group should contain equipment that have
similar components and operational characteristics (resulting in similar analysis signatures). This provides another way of grouping equipment that have similar analysis criteria.
Equipment Type Code: - Select one of the following equipment types:
1RVSHHGQRORDG
&RQVWDQWVSHHGFRQVWDQWORDG
9DULDEOHVSHHGFRQVWDQWORDG
&RQVWDQWVSHHGYDULDEOHORDG
9DULDEOHVSHHGYDULDEOHORDG



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

With variable speed and/or load type equipment, the machinery analyzer will
prompt the operator to enter the variable before taking data.
1RWH

For MotorView rotor bar analysis, select variable speed the first time
the measurement is made. The running speed is needed for calibrating the first spectrum. After the first measurement, the equipment type code can be changed to your preference.
After accepting the first menu, the first of a two-page Define Motor Points menu is
displayed.

Motor File Motor ID Number: - Enter the motor ID number. This is either the
number assigned to the motor entry in the User Component Warehouse where
you stored the motor nameplate data, or the number of an existing motor in the
CSI warehouse file. Press the Motor Lookup key if you are unsure of the motor ID
assigned.

8VLQJ0RWRU9LHZV$XWRPDWLF'%$6(6HWXS



1RWH

When specifying the motor that is to be associated with the current


piece of equipment, there is an option to toggle between the CSI and
User Component Warehouse files. This selection determines in
which file the specified motor ID is located.

1RWH

MotorView will not create measurement points unless a motor is


pointed to by selecting a valid motor ID number.
Measurement Point Running Speed (RPM): - enter the running speed you wish
to have assigned to the measurement points you are creating.
1RWH

The software expects consistency between the measurement point


running speed and the number of poles in the motor file ID containing the motor nameplate data.
The responses to the following three fields will be used by the software to help
define alarm limit sets.
Motor Enclosure Type: - Select Open Equipment or Totally Enclosed Equipment.
Motor Insulation Type: - Select from Class A, B, F or H. This is the class of the insulation in the stator. Select H if insulation type is not A, B, F, or H.
Motor Bearing Type: - Select from Roller Element or Sleeve.
Temperature Input Mode: - Answer Measured or Keypad. Select measured if the
output of the temperature probe (assumed to appear in units of volts/engineering
units, volts/F, or volts/C) is input directly to the machinery analyzer via a cable.
Select Keypad if the temperature values are to be entered manually into the
machinery analyzer.
Temperature Probe Type: - If the Temperature Input Mode is selected as measured, enter Model 505, Model 510, Model 515, or General. If General is selected,
you must enter the temperature probe sensitivity in the next field.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

General Temperature Probe Sensitivity: - If the Temperature Input Mode is


selected as measured, and the temperature probe type has been specified as 505,
510, or 515, Setup DBASE automatically selects the correct sensitivity factor. If
Temperature Probe type has been specified as General, you must enter the sensitivity of the probe.
Current Clamp Sensitivity (V/Amps): - Enter the sensor sensitivity of the clamp-on
CT used. Sensor sensitivities of CSI current probes are as follows:




$



%&'



Permanent CT Ratio: - For applications where the clamp-on is placed around a lead
from a permanently installed (CT) current transformer (such as measurements
taken on ammeters located on switchgears or in control centers), the sensitivity for
the measurement point is:

The permanent CT ratio must be entered. MotorView will calculate the correct
sensitivity based on this and the previous field entry.
1RWH

The typical permanent CT has a current output maximum of five


amps. If you are uncertain about the CT ratio of your permanent CT,
use the following to make an estimate of the CT ratio.
If the faceplate of the current meter on the panel of the control center
for your motor goes to 500 amps, a good guess for the CT ratio would
be 500/5 = 100. You need to check to see if this is actually correct by
verifying that the 21xx meter and the control center display the same
current reading (while using this fixed CT ratio).

8VLQJ0RWRU9LHZV$XWRPDWLF'%$6(6HWXS



After answering the questions on the first screen, accept the screen to bring up the
following display. This screen is a list of proactive motor monitoring measurement
points, which the software can create. To select a particular point to create, click the
check box beside that measurement point. If the checkbox beside a measurement
point is not checked that particular measurement point will not be created.

1RWH

Setup DBASE is not intended to be an editor. It can only write new


measurement points to the database. Therefore, if a measurement
point already exists, Setup DBASE will not change the contents of the
point. Changes to measurement points must be made within the
AMS Machinery Manager Database Setup and Management
(DBASE) program.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

The diagram below indicates positions for acquiring temperature measurements.



)LJ7KLVILJXUHVKRZV LQDJHQHUDOZD\ WKHFRUUHFWSRVLWLRQRQDPRWRUWRPRQLWRUWKH


GLIIHUHQWWHPSHUDWXUHPHDVXUHPHQWSRLQWV

1RWH

Full discussions of the locations and methods of measurement


appear in appropriate sections of the following chapters (with references to this drawing).
Skin Temperature measurements are taken radially. The measurement points
should be marked at positions located over the stator windings.

8VLQJ0RWRU9LHZV$XWRPDWLF'%$6(6HWXS



Unless the ambient air temperature is different at each end of the motor and
intake air inlets are at each end, the ambient air temperature can be obtained with
point TAF. Points TAO and TAI may be omitted. In general, as long as the motor
foot temperature is a good indicator of ambient air temperature, TAF is the only
ambient temperature point needed.
Flux coil measurements are required for optional operation of MotorView. Ideally,
flux measurements should be acquired from the outboard end of the motor, with
the coil axially centered. If this is possible, answer Yes for FC1 and No for FF1. If
a center flux measurement is impossible, answer No for FC1 and Yes for FF1.
Basic electric current rotor bar analysis requires a reading on only one phase. By
creating RB1 with a Yes response, Setup DBASE will choose the proper analysis
parameter set to evaluate rotor faults. RB2 and RB3 are low resolution measurements taken on phase B and C, respectively, so that MotorView can calculate current imbalance. If a current imbalance measurement is not desired, answer No
for RB2 and RB3. For DC motors, select No as the response for RB1, RB2, and
RB3.
Observation points are visual objective points created to stimulate awareness of
potential heating due to dirt and decreased air flow. Answer Yes to create these
points.
After reviewing the fields on the two setup menus, click the OK button to create the
measurement points. This has created the first piece of equipment; additional
equipment can be created by repeating this procedure. Finally, a route can be created and data for these measurement points acquired.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

6DYLQJ6SHFWUDDQG:DYHIRUPV
Model 21xx series machinery analyzers must be instructed to store the acquired
spectra and (if desired) waveform data. There are two methods that can be used to
do this. The method used depends on the type of route that will be downloaded
into the analyzer.
If the route only contains measurement points used for current analysis or if there
are only a few mixed measurement points on the route, you can use the Save Route
Spectra and/or Save Route Waveform Data functions on the Modify Route Storage
option menu of the ROUTE program. Refer to the AMS Machinery Manager user
manuals for more information.
If you have a large number of mixed measurement points in the route, the above
method will consume a considerable amount of analyzer memory. An alternative
method is to use the Specify Storage On Individual Measurement Points option of
the Modify Route Storage function within the (AMS Machinery Manager)
ROUTE program. Individual measurement points can then be specified to always
store spectra and/or waveforms without affecting any other measurement points.
Refer to the AMS Machinery Manager user manuals for more information.
1RWH

Electric current waveforms in general do not provide much information by themselves. It is suggested that a reference waveform be
stored. However, to save disk space, no additional electric current
waveforms need to be saved.

6DYLQJ6SHFWUDDQG:DYHIRUPV



0DQXDOO\6HOHFWLQJ$QDO\VLV3DUDPHWHU6HWV
If for some reason you do not want to use MotorViews automatic Setup DBASE
feature, this section discusses recommendations for manual setup of analysis
parameter sets.

5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV
For best results, a 3200 line spectra with maximum frequency (Fmax) of 80 Hz is
recommended. To improve the dynamic range of measurements taken from the
secondary sides of permanent current transformers, the Model 750 preprocessor
can be used with Model 2115 analyzers. To use the Model 750, answer Yes beside
Use Analog Preprocessor. Then select 0 for Filter Setting and Off for Envelope
Demodulator.
1RWH

A Model 750 is not required for Model 2115 analyzer measurements,


but can help where noisy signals are present. Model 2120 analyzers
have greater dynamic range (and incorporate a built-in demodulator) and therefore do not require a Model 750.

)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV
For best results, 3200 line spectra should be collected for the flux coil data. The
analysis for these faults is performed by inspection of two flux spectra. The low frequency spectrum is a high resolution spectrum with a maximum frequency of at
least three times running speed or two times line frequency (whichever is greater).
In practice, for 2-pole, 4-pole, and >4-pole motors, Setup DBASE uses 185, 155, and 125 Hz
bandwidths, respectively.
Analysis of this spectrum provides information on the rotor condition, changes in
voltage balance and some stator fault detection. The high frequency spectrum
contains slot pass family frequencies which provide indication of stator related
faults. The maximum frequency for these spectra is at least the principal slot pass
(PSP) plus fifteen times line frequency. Principal slot pass (PSP) equals the number
of rotor bars (or stator slots) times running speed, minus line frequency ((#RBxSPEED)-LF).



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

$GGLQJRU(GLWLQJ0RWRU0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVZLWK'%$6(
Proactive motor monitoring measurement points can be added to either a group
of points already assigned to an existing piece of equipment, or to a new piece of
equipment. You can also edit points which have already been defined.
For reference, Fig. 2-1, Measurement Points Created Using the Setup DBASE
Function on page 2-13 displays specific information needed to define proactive
motor monitoring measurement points used by MotorView.
(GLWLQJD0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQW

With the Database Setup (DBASE) program running, select the Tree Structure
option to display the database tree. Select the measurement point on the tree, then
select the Edit button on the Function Bar to display the Measurement Point
Information menu.
$GGLQJD0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQW

With the Database Setup (DBASE) program running, select the Tree Structure
option to display the database tree. Select the Equipment on the tree, then select
the New button on the Function Bar to display the Measurement Point Information menu to add the new point.
Selecting either the Edit or the New Function Bar options displays the same
two-tab screen that appears when Edit (Point) is selected.

$GGLQJRU(GLWLQJ0RWRU0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVZLWK'%$6(



0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQW,QIRUPDWLRQ7DE

With the Periodic Technology and a Point selected, clicking on Edit displays the
Periodic Vibration Measurement Point Parameters screen. The Point Information
Tab has the following options.



Measurement Point ID: - This is a three character alphanumeric string that is


uniquely defined for each measurement point on a monitored piece of equipment. For MotorView II, measurement points are labeled as to the type of analysis.
Recommended measurement point IDs are defined in Fig. 2-3, Measurement
Point IDs for Motor Analysis on page 2-27.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

0HDVXUHPHQW
7\SH

0HDVXUHPHQW
3RLQW,'

$GGLQJRU(GLWLQJ0RWRU0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVZLWK'%$6(

'HVFULSWLRQ



762

6NLQWHPSHUDWXUHWDNHQUDGLDOO\RQRXWERDUGVLGH

76&

6NLQWHPSHUDWXUHWDNHQUDGLDOO\DWFHQWHU

76,

6NLQ7HPSHUDWXUHWDNHQUDGLDOO\RQLQERDUGVLGH

7$)

$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHWDNHQRIIRIPRWRUIRRW

7$2

$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHWDNHQLQDLUDWRXWERDUG
HQG

7$,

$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHWDNHQLQDLUDWLQERDUGHQG

7%2

%HDULQJWHPSHUDWXUHRXWERDUG

7%,

%HDULQJWHPSHUDWXUHLQERDUG

7&3

&RXSOLQJWHPSHUDWXUHWDNHQDWKRWWHVWVSRWRQ
KRUL]RQWDOFHQWHUOLQH RIWKHFRXSOLQJ

77+

7HPSHUDWXUHRIWHUPLQDOKRXVLQJ

)&

IOX[PHDVXUHPHQWWDNHQDWD[LDOFHQWHUORZ
IUHTXHQF\

)&

)OX[PHDVXUHPHQWWDNHQDWD[LDOFHQWHUVORW
SDVV7KHILUVWWZROHWWHUVPXVWEHWKHVDPHDV
WKRVHLQWKHDVVRFLDWHGORZIUHTXHQF\VSHFWUXP

))

)OX[PHDVXUHPHQWWDNHQD[LDOO\LQRIIFHQWHU
SRVLWLRQORZIUHTXHQF\

))

)OX[PHDVXUHPHQWWDNHQD[LDOO\LQRIIFHQWHU
SRVLWLRQVORWSDVV7KHILUVWWZROHWWHUVPXVWEH
WKHVDPHDVWKRVHLQWKHDVVRFLDWHGORZ
IUHTXHQF\VSHFWUXP

5%

(OHFWULFFXUUHQWURWRUEDUDQDO\VLVWDNHQRQSKDVH
$

5%

(OHFWULFFXUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQWIRUSKDVHEDODQFH
WDNHQRQSKDVH%

5%

(OHFWULFFXUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQWIRUSKDVHEDODQFH
WDNHQRQSKDVH&

6KDIW&XUUHQW

6+&

0HDVXUHVWKHVKDIWFXUUHQW

6KDIW9ROWDJH

6+9

0HDVXUHVWKHVKDIWYROWDJH

7HPSHUDWXUH

)OX[

5RWRU%DU



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

2EVHUYDWLRQV

2&1

2EMHFWLYHREVHUYDWLRQRIPRWRUFOHDQOLQHVV

2$)

2EMHFWLYHREVHUYDWLRQRIDLUIORZTXDOLW\WKURXJK
PRWRU

)LJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQW,'VIRU0RWRU$QDO\VLV

1RWH

Low and high frequency flux measurements are to be taken as a set.


Therefore, the first two letters for the measurement point ID that
describe the low and high frequency flux points must be the same.
Measurement PointDescription: can contain up to 32 characters to uniquely
identify each measurement point. Use of this parameter is not mandatory and the
description can be left blank (or shortened) to reduce equipment analyzer
memory consumption.
Units Type Code: - From the selection window which appears when you click on
the arrow box, select the units type code of interest by double clicking on the appropriate choice. For proactive motor monitoring measurement points, refer to the
codes displayed in the following table. MotorView II looks for specific measurement point IDs or Units Type Codes to determine the type of analysis.
1RWH

You must select Keypad or Temperature for temperature measurements.

1RWH

The following table includes information about the Units Type


Codes of the measurement points that can be defined by the Setup
DBASE feature of MotorView.

$GGLQJRU(GLWLQJ0RWRU0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVZLWK'%$6(



Code

Description

127(7KHIROORZLQJ8QLWV7\SH&RGHVDUHXVHGSULPDULO\E\0RWRU9LHZ
&XUUHQW

8VHGIRUHOHFWULFFXUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQWV

)OX[/RZ)UHT

)RUXVHZLWKWKHIOX[FRLO7KLVVKRXOGEHXVHGIRUORZ
IUHTXHQF\KLJKUHVROXWLRQ OLQHV IOX[DQDO\VLV/RZ
IUHTXHQF\LVGHILQHGLQWKLVLQVWDQFHDVQRPRUHWKDQWKH
PD[LPXPRI [/) +]RU/) [536 +]

)OX[6ORW3DVV

)RUXVHZLWKWKHIOX[FRLO7KLVW\SHVKRXOGEHXVHGIRUKLJK
IUHTXHQF\IOX[DQDO\VLV+LJKIUHTXHQF\LVGHILQHGLQWKLV
LQVWDQFHDVWKHODUJHURIVWDWRUVORWSDVVRUURWRUVORWSDVVSOXV
+]

6KDIW9ROWDJH

8VHGIRUVKDIWYROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQWVXVLQJWKH636KDIW
3UREH

6KDIW&XUUHQW

8VHGIRUVKDIWFXUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQWVXVLQJWKH636KDIW
3UREH

.H\SDG,QSXW

.H\SDGLQSXWLQDUELWUDU\XQLWV

7HPSHUDWXUH

7HPSHUDWXUHLQ'HJUHHV)RU&
8QLWV7\SH&RGHV8VHGE\0RWRU9LHZ

Units: - enter units appropriate for the defined Units Type Code. If the Units Type
Code is specified as Current, Flux/Low Freq, Flux Slot Pass, Shaft Voltage, or Shaft
Current, you may type in the word Standard. DBASE will then automatically
apply the correct Unit definition.
RPM at Measurement Point: - specify the normal running speed (in RPM) of the
motor.
Monitoring Schedule(Days): An effective predictive maintenance program
requires regular, periodic data collection to be taken on the monitored piece of
equipment. Enter the number of days (0 to 2000) that will elapse between each
data collection for this measurement point. For example, enter the number 30 for
a monthly data collection schedule.
The EXPORT program will use these numbers to generate an exception report for
any equipment and measurement points not meeting this schedule.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

1RWH

The number entered will effect the icon display for the Alarm Status.
If data is analyzed and the Monitoring Schedule (Days) has not
expired, a color will be present on the Alarm Status icon. If there is no
data acquired within the Monitoring Schedule (Days) since the
analysis, the Alarm Status icon will not display with a color. Entering
0 for the Monitoring Schedule (Days) ignores this field and the
Alarm Status icon will always display with color.
Number of Data Values In StatisticalCalculations: used in the early stages of setting up a database, in order to acquire data that will be used to generate statistical
alarm limits (Bs) for this measurement point. The parameter entered in this field
designates how many data collection sessions (1 to 1000) will be used to acquire
these data. After this number of samples has been taken, the statistical alarm (Bs)
will not change. CSI recommends a minimum of six data values.
Clear Fault FrequencySetup: When selected, resets all of the variables located on
the fault frequency table to the undefined status. When not selected, retains the
existing values and is useful when creating or modifying consecutive measurement
points which use the same fault frequencies.
Data Collection Set (DCS) Information descriptions follow.
Analysis Parameter SetID: designates the analysis parameter set of this measurement point. Enter the number (1 through 512) that corresponds to the desired
analysis parameter set. For measurement points that have been specified as DCtype signals (Static/DC Input, Keypad Input, and Temperature), enter a 0 for the
set ID. The Help command on this screen will display the current analysis parameter set, and enable you to change to a new set.
1RWH

TheView AP Sets or View AL Sets Function Bar buttons can be used


to display the available sets for assignment for both Analysis Parameters and Alarm Limits (you do not have to have the cursor on these
fields to activate these functions).

$GGLQJRU(GLWLQJ0RWRU0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVZLWK'%$6(



Thedisplayed window provides a view of the currently defined


set. Other sets can be viewed by using the Prev Set and Next Set
commands. The displayed set can be automatically assigned to the
measurement point with the Select Set command or the currently
assigned set can be retained by using the No Change command.
Alarm Limit Set ID: - No alarm limits are necessary for rotor bar or flux analysis.
Enter a zero for electric current and flux points. After accepting the menu, a message will be displayed that no alarm checking will be done. For other proactive measurement points, the appropriate alarm limit set is created and assigned to the
proper point by MotorViews automatic Setup DBASE.
1RWH

For measurement points that have been specified as DC-type signals


in a database, the recommended procedure is to enter the alarm
limits on the second page of the measurement point window (enter
a 0 for Alarm Limit Set ID). However, if there are many such DC-type
signals within the same database, it is preferable to define an alarm
limit set for these signals even though only the overall value will be
used (this procedure is recommended for keypad and temperature
readings as well). See the DC Type Signals section for more information.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

Sensor/Signal Info Tab

ProbeType: select casing or shaft.

SensorOrientation: available options are Unknown, Horizontal, Vertical, Axial,


Radial, Radial-X, Radial-Y, and Tangential.
SensorPosition: the options are Unknown, Inboard, Outboard, Housing, Foundation, and Pipe/Duct.
Provide SensorPower? Answer No.
Sensor Sensitivity: - Enter the appropriate sensitivity (Volts/Engineering Unit) for
the sensor acquiring data for this measurement point.
For applications where the clamp on current clamp is placed around a permanently installed current transformer (CT), the sensitivity will be:



$GGLQJRU(GLWLQJ0RWRU0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVZLWK'%$6(



When using the Model 341B, this is:



Example: A CSI Model 341C current clamp is used to measure the current from the secondary side of a (CT) current transformer (measurement taken at the switchgear). The permanent CT ratio is 75:5 (this is
equivalent to 15:1). Therefore, the sensor sensitivity is:



1RWH

Other sensitivity settings for MotorView are shown in Figure 2-1,


Measurement Points Created Using the Setup DBASE Function on
page 2-13.
DC Offset in Volts: - This is the voltage (VO) that should be subtracted from the
measured voltage (V) reading on the input signal before the sensitivity (S) is
applied in order to convert to engineering units (EU).


Signal Group/Channel Number: - specifies the signals and channels to be grouped


when using multiplexer or triaxial sensors. When you use a shaft probe, you are
measuring one measurement point in two different settings: current and voltage.
For example, signal group 1 will include signal channel 1 (SHC) and signal
channel 2 (SHV). Values for the signal group must be between 0 and 48. Values for
the signal channel must be between 0 and 4. Set the signal group and channel to 0
if you are monitoring only one of the measurement points. Setting up the shaft
probe measurements as a group will enable the data collector to acquire both measurements automatically without the need for user interaction between measurements.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

1RWH

The Tools/Calc. Sens and Tools/DC Off. selections provide simplified calculators to determine both sensitivity and DC offset.
Measurement is Set to (or Will Not)$uto-Range this option is turned on/off
by using the button on the Sensor/Signal Info tab.
Plotting Full ScaleRange: only used if the Analysis Parameter Set has been set
to disable measurement autoranging. When used, this option determines how a data
collector spectrum plot will be scaled.
&DXWLRQ

Exercise care when using this option since an inappropriate value can seriously
affect the quality of your data.
HFD Full ScaleRange: not used with CSIs present family of 1010 and 21xx
meters but retained for compatibility with some very early data collector models.
Lowest/HighestValid SignalLevel: specifies limits (in engineering units) for
the lowest and highest readings that are expected for this measurement point.
Readings below or above these limits may indicate an equipment malfunction or
incorrect measurement procedure. If you want to disable one or both of these
limits, enter a 0 for that parameter. See Figure 2-1, Measurement Points Created
Using the Setup DBASE Function on page 2-13 for more information.
1RWH

If the signal sampled falls outside the range defined by the lowest to
highest valid signal level, Bad Reading is displayed on the Model
21xx series analyzer screen.

$GGLQJRU(GLWLQJ0RWRU0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVZLWK'%$6(



)DXOW)UHTXHQF\6HWXS
A fault frequency must be assigned to flux and electric current measurement
points. (See Note below for exception.) Fault frequencies will be included automatically with measurement points created when MotorViews Setup DBASE
option is used to automatically set up the proactive motor monitoring measurement points. The choice between CSI or User determines which Component
Warehouse file the specified Motor ID references. The fault frequency set is designated as type MTRC with the Specific Element ID or Component/Set ID field
referring to the file number of the specific motor to be analyzed.



1RWH

If you create the flux and electric current measurement point using
RBMwizard, you can create the measurement point with the Equipment Configuration instead of the Component Warehouse. The
Component Warehouse is a file referenced by fault frequency setups.
For details, see Using RBMwizard to Create Motor Points on page
2-4.



&UHDWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQWVIRU0RWRU9LHZ

&KDSWHU 

&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

2YHUYLHZ
Because the Globals options and spectral plotting functions described in the following sections are used by both MotorView I and MotorView II, they have been
separated from other material and placed in this chapter. In chapters that follow
(where appropriate), comments have been added that refer back to this chapter.



'HILQLQJ0RWRU9LHZ*OREDO3DUDPHWHUV
Selecting the Globals option on the Function Bar from the Motor Analysis Options
or Motor Display Options screens allows you to define global preferences which
can affect how MotorView analyzes and displays data.
Many of the general Globals options are covered in detail in the Diagnostic Plotting (PLOTDATA) chapter of the AMS Machinery Manager VibView Reference
Manual. The following Globals options apply specifically to MotorView.
5302SWLRQV

Format for Speed Values: - select RPS or RPM to display the equipment speed in
either Revolutions Per Second (Hz) or Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

Slot Pass Flux Factor: when MotorView uses its algorithm to find slot pass frequency peaks, it looks at peaks that are not harmonics of line frequency. How much
any peak differs from a line frequency harmonic is relative. If the principal slot pass
(PSP) frequency peak is too close, relatively speaking, to a harmonic of line frequency, the algorithm will not be able to locate the PSP peak. Therefore the closeness of the PSP peak and the interfering harmonic of line frequency should be
adjusted so the PSP peak can be found. To adjust this closeness, choose one of the
factors displayed in the following table. A small factor will allow the PSP frequency
peak to be chosen closer to a line frequency harmonic peak than will any of the
other selections. The smaller the selection number, the closer to line frequency harmonics the algorithm is allowed to look when searching for peaks which are members of slot pass families.
6HOHFWLRQ

'HILQLWLRQ

6PDOOIDFWRU

0HGLXPIDFWRU

/DUJHIDFWRU

([WUDODUJHIDFWRU

Locate the RPM of Spectra if: - MotorView will use its own algorithm to calculate the
speed for a particular spectrum (provided one of the options listed below is
selected). Use any key to toggle Yes or No. (Unless Save any Modified RPM? is
selected, the located RPM will not be saved.)
1RWH

For the low frequency, high resolution flux spectra (F?1), you are
urged to let the program locate the speed, even if you measured it
independently and keyed it in, or used a tach for an input. The
reason for this is that in subsequent analysis of high frequency flux
data, the software relies upon the accuracy of the speed tied to the low
frequency data. The running speed algorithm is, in general, able to
easily identify the running speed from sideband and/or harmonic
families in the low frequency flux data.
Previously Unlocated? - locates the RPM of the Spectrum (Yes is the normal setting)
if the RPM of a spectrum has not been located (by any means). The software will
use an algorithm to locate the speed.

'HILQLQJ0RWRU9LHZ*OREDO3DUDPHWHUV



Located by Algorithm? - if the spectra has previously had the RPM calculated by the algorithm, selecting this option will cause the algorithm
to recalculate the RPM (normally not selected).
Measured from Tach? - if a spectrum has previously had the RPM calculated by a tach, selecting this option will cause the algorithm to recalculate the RPM (normally not selected).
Manually set by User? - if a spectra has previously had the RPM
entered by the user, selecting this option will cause the algorithm to
recalculate the RPM (normally not selected).
Save any Modified RPM? - saves an RPM that is modified by any means (when executing MotorView).
$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV

Electrical Line Frequency Enter the frequency value for the motor supply electrical line frequency. For induction motors, this is either 50 or 60 Hz. The line frequency is dictated by the country. Sometimes generators will produce the current
supplied to induction motors. The line frequency for these motors could be different then 50 or 60 Hz.



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

1RWH

Variable frequency motors can be evaluated in MotorView. To do this,


the motor must first be defined as a variable frequency motor. If the
line frequency of the variable frequency motor is entered, MotorView
will search for the entered value and use the located value as the line
frequency. If 50 or 60 Hz is entered (and the motor has been created
in FRQCAL or Component Design Studio as a variable frequency
name), MotorView will find the largest peak in the spectrum and
assume that it is the line frequency peak. For more information, see
Variable Frequency Motor Analysis on page 4-18.

'HILQLQJ0RWRU9LHZ*OREDO3DUDPHWHUV



3ORWWLQJD6SHFWUXP
Spectra can be viewed for analysis of electric current, flux coil, and shaft probe data.
When viewing spectra, many operations or functions can be applied by using the
Function bar, Cursor bar, or Tool bar. Whether performing rotor analysis from current measurements (MotorView I and II), flux analysis (MotorView II only), or
shaft probe analysis (MotorView II only), spectral operations are the same. Any differences between the analysis options will be noted where they are described.
After selecting options in the Motor Analysis Options screen, MotorView advances
to the database tree. Select the Area, Equipment, and measurement point to plot.

)LJ6HOHFWLQJD0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQW

1RWH

Although MotorView is organized to display items in AMS Machinery


Managers hierarchical fashion (Database, Area, Equipment, Measurement Point), the selection menu functions are similar to those in
MS-Windows. A + in front of an item means that there are additional items that can be displayed (below) by clicking on it. A in
front of an item means that there are no more items to display (you
can expand or collapse the tree elements by clicking on the icon).



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

Next, choose plot display options from the Motor Display Options screen.
Accepting this screen advances the program to the plot display. The plotting tools
used by MotorView are similar to those used by the AMS Machinery Manager Diagnostic Plotting (PLOTDATA) program. These tools are described in detail in the
AMS Machinery Manager VibView Reference Manual.

)LJ6LQJOH6SHFWUXP3ORWDQG&RPPDQGV6FUHHQ'HVFULSWLRQ

1RWH

When the function, program, listing, graphics, or plot function/tool


bars have been toggled off, moving the cursor to the edge of the
window where the bar usually resides, will cause the tool bar to be displayed.

3ORWWLQJD6SHFWUXP



0RWRU2SWLRQ)XQFWLRQ%DU.H\V
Associating the correct running speed with each spectral measurement is critical to
the proper operation of the MotorView software. Running speeds can be manually
set based on identified spectral peaks that are sidebands (about line frequency) or
harmonics of running speed. Future analysis of this spectra will use the manually
set speed (provided this speed is saved to the database). If speeds associated with
user selected peaks are not reasonable, the original speed is unchanged. A calibration procedure for electric current measurement points provides MotorView a preliminary estimate of the running speed based on the current being drawn by the
motor. This estimate is used as a starting point in a speed location algorithm in the
software.
1RWH

Speed selection can be saved permanently to the spectra if Save Any


Modified RPM is selected in the Globals menu.

6HW530)XQFWLRQ.H\
This section provides explanations of the options that are available when you select
the Set RPM function bar option. After pressing the Set RPM function button,
options available to locate the speed are:



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

13[6)6LGHEDQG

This option assumes the spectral peaks that are marked by the analyst are the numbers of poles multiplied by the Slip Frequency sidebands, and then calculates a
speed based on that assumption. Before selecting this option, complete these steps:
1. . . Place the cursor on the line frequency peak and use the Locate Peak
function key to locate the peak.
2. . . Press the Cursor function key and select the Sideband option.
3. . . Mark the line frequency peak using the Setmark function key.
4. . . Move the cursor left to the sideband peak desired and Locate the peak
using the Locate Peak function key.
5. . . Press the Set RPM function key and accept the NPxSF Sideband option
(the speed associated with the chosen sideband will appear in a message
box).
6. . . Accept this speed to assign the new speed to the spectra.
1RWH

If the speed is greater than synchronous or so low that the associated


load is greater than 150%, the new speed will not be accepted and a message will appear.

0RWRU2SWLRQ)XQFWLRQ%DU.H\V



6SHHG6LGHEDQG

This option assumes the spectral peaks marked by the analyst are running speed
sidebands about the line frequency peak, and calculates a speed based on that
assumption. The correct NPxSF sidebands are then located based on this speed.
Before selecting this option, complete these steps:
1. . . Place the cursor on the line frequency peak and use the Locate Peak
function key to locate the peak.
2. . . Press the Cursor function key and select the Sideband option.
3. . . Mark the line frequency peak using the Setmark function key.
4. . . Move the cursor left to the sideband peak desired and Locate the peak
using the Locate Peak function key.
5. . . Press the Set RPM function key and accept the Speed Sideband option
(the speed associated with the chosen sideband will appear in a message
box).
6. . . Accept this speed to assign the new speed to the spectra.
1RWH

If the speed is greater than synchronous or so low that the associated


load is greater than 150%, the new speed will not be accepted and a message will appear.
5XQQLQJ6SHHG

This option assumes the spectral peak marked by the analyst is some integer multiple of the running speed of the motor, and sets the running speed accordingly.
The correct NPxSF sidebands are then located based on this speed. Before
selecting this option, complete these steps:
1. . . Place the cursor on the desired running speed multiple.
2. . . Locate the peak by pressing the Locate Peak function key.
3. . . Press the Set RPM function key and accept the Running Speed Option (a
box then appears allowing you to set the RPM based on the peak selected).



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

&DOLEUDWLRQ)XQFWLRQ.H\
The purpose of calibration is to provide a means for estimating the speed of the
motor from the current drawn by the motor (avoiding the need to actually measure the running speed each time data is collected). This is accomplished by producing a load curve specific to each motor. It is important to note that calibration
only has to be performed once for each electric current measurement point.
Every motor has its own load curve. Since a specific load curve for a particular
motor is unknown, a generic load curve is assigned to each measurement point
based on the nameplate full load amps (FLA) and rated speed (RPM). The generic
load curve is constructed by drawing a straight line through two points, one defined by full load
amps and rated speed, the other defined by no-load amps and synchronous speed. An example
of a generic curve is shown in Fig 3-3.

)LJ6KRZVWKHGHILQLWLRQRIWKHJHQHULFORDGFXUYHDQGWKHZD\LWLVVKLIWHGWRFUHDWHWKH
FDOLEUDWHGFXUYHZKHQWKHPHDVXUHPHQWSRLQWLVFDOLEUDWHGLQ0RWRU9LHZ

0RWRU2SWLRQ)XQFWLRQ%DU.H\V



Note that at FLA, the associated speed is Rated. When calibration is performed,
the load curve is shifted to intersect the calibration point. This calibration point
consists of the measured LF amplitude (via the spectrum) and measured running
speed (verified by either strobing or taching the motor). MotorView will use this
new load curve to estimate the speed. The generic load curve will shift up or down
because of calibration. Therefore, for the same rated speed as specified on the
nameplate, the calibrated load curve will provide for a different FLA. Do not be
alarmed by this as the purpose of the load curve is only to estimate the speed.
Now that a calibrated load curve has been established, it is important to understand
how MotorView determines which sidebands to choose. For an explanation, refer
to the plot in Fig 3-4.

)LJ (OHFWULFFXUUHQWVSHFWUDOSORWGLVSOD\HGZLWKWKH13[6)VLGHEDQGV
PDUNHGE\GRWWHGOLQHV



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

MotorView uses the amplitude of the line frequency (LF) peak and the load curve
(see Fig. 3-3, Shows the definition of the generic load curve and the way it is shifted
to create the calibrated curve when the measurement point is calibrated in MotorView. on page 3-11) to determine an estimated speed for the motor. Based on this
speed, it calculates the slip frequency (SF) and then, using the number of poles, calculates NPxSF. It then looks at all peaks within some frequency window about this
frequency, and based on a weighted point system (which weighs amplitude, frequency, etc.), it picks the peak which it considers to be the correct NPxSF sideband.
The actual speed is determined based on the sideband selected.
1RWH

The Calibrate option (on the function bar) calibrates a load curve
specific to the measurement point being analyzed. MotorView
requires that the Calibrate key be used on the initial data for each
electric current measurement point to ensure that the proper curve
is determined for the motor represented by this point. If the initial
data have no sidebands at NPxSF, then the measured running speed
should be entered manually under Measured RPS (RPM) for this
Spectrum (see following Motor Current Calibration Data menu). A
future data point having proper sidebands can be used to recalibrate
the measurement point, if desired.
After selecting Calibration from the function bar, the Motor Current Calibration
Data screen will be displayed.

0RWRU2SWLRQ)XQFWLRQ%DU.H\V



Selected NPxSF Sideband Frequency: - indicates the frequency of the lower


NPxSF sideband either as selected by the MotorView software or as selected using
the method described in the following note.
1RWH

To specify a NPxSF sideband frequency that is different from the


computer-selected frequency, return to the plot using the No Change
key. Place the cursor on the line frequency peak, locate the peak with
the Locate Peak key and press the SetMark key. Move the sideband
cursor to the proper NPxSF sideband frequency peak, locate it with
the Locate Peak key, and press the Calibrate key to return to the
Motor Current Calibration Data screen.
Line Frequency Amps Measured with Analyzer: - This value indicates the measured amplitude of the line frequency when the data were collected. It is the value
the analyzer calculates given the sensitivity entered for the measurement point.
True Line Frequency Amps at Motor Primary: - This field can be used to enter
the magnitude of actual motor supply current. If the sensor sensitivity was correctly
entered at the measurement point setup in DBASE, no adjustments need to be
made for this selection. By changing the amplitude, an adjustment factor will be calculated to compensate for the analyzer acquired amplitude values. An adjustment
would be useful, for example, if the sensitivity was incorrectly entered in the DBASE
measurement point setup. This will sometimes occur when measurements are
taken on secondary sides of switchgear current transformers and the CT ratio at
the switch gear is not known when setting up the point.
&DXWLRQ

Provided the value for True LF Amps has been altered, do not change the sensor
sensitivity at the measurement point in DBASE if data have already been collected. Changing the DBASE setup will cause future measurements to have different amplitudes than those acquired prior to a change in the DBASE setup.



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

Measured RPM/RPS for this Spectrum: - This field indicates the RPM/RPS that
was calculated for this spectrum. The speed is derived from the sidebands chosen
by MotorView. If this is a spectrum being calibrated and the speed displayed is not
the speed found by taching or strobing the motor, then the actual sideband correlating to NPxSF should be determined. The procedure for finding these sidebands
is specified in Different Calibration Methods on page 3-16. In the case where
there is no sideband associated with NPxSF, the recorded speed should be entered
in this field.
1RWH

When using the cursor to locate the NPxSF sidebands, the speed correlated with this sideband is displayed in the field for Measured
RPM/RPS for this Spectrum.
Rated Full Load RPM/RPS for Motor: - This value indicates the full-load RPM/
RPS rating as indicated on the motor nameplate. MotorView finds this from the motor
entry in the User Component Warehouse file, identified by the MTRC fault frequency assigned
to the measurement point. This information can also come from the Equipment Configuration
information.
Modify Motor Calibration?: - Answer Yes to accept the above information and
update the database for this measurement point. A No answer returns to the
present analysis without performing any modifications.
)XQFWLRQ%DU2SWLRQV

Explanations are:
No Change: leaves all Motor Current Calibration Data as is (unchanged).
Plot Setup: returns you to the Motor Analysis Display Options screen in order to
modify the setup, etc. After accepting the Motor Analysis Display Options menus,
the program returns to the spectral plot, not the calibration menu.
RPS vs RPM: toggles the displayed fields between Revolutions Per Second (RPS)
and Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).

0RWRU2SWLRQ)XQFWLRQ%DU.H\V



Initialize: the Initialize key removes all calibration data for the currently displayed
measurement point and reverts to the load curve derived from the User Component Warehouse or Equipment Configuration nameplate data of the motor.
'LIIHUHQW&DOLEUDWLRQ0HWKRGV

Three methods that can be used to calibrate are:


1. . . The first method is simple. If the motor speed displayed in the upper right
corner of the spectrum is equal to the tached motor speed, select
Calibration. This displays the Motor Current Calibration Data menu; with
the modify Motor Calibration field selected, accept the screen to perform
the calibration. The measurement point has now been calibrated and a
calibrated load curve has been calculated. If the speed displayed in the top
right-hand corner of the spectrum is incorrect, then a more involved
calibration process is required.
2. . . The second method requires calculation of the individual NPxSF sideband
frequency peak where:

This sideband peak can be located by first placing the cursor on the line
frequency peak, locating it with the Locate Peak function key, and
pressing the SetMark function key. Then the cursor is moved to the left
until the nearest peak with a frequency difference of NPxSF is identified.
The cursor is then located by pressing the Locate Peak function key. The
Calibration key can now be pressed. In the calibration menu, the value for
the Measured RPM/RPS for this Spectrum is derived from the sideband
frequency which was just located with the Locate Peak function key. With
the Modify Motor Calibration field selected, accept the menu to calibrate
this spectrum.
3. . . When using the second method, if there is no peak at the frequency
calculated for the sideband frequency, use method three. Press the
Calibration key from the displayed spectrum. Next, the strobed or tached
speed is manually entered under Measured RPM/RPS for this Spectrum.
With the Modify Motor Calibration field selected, accept the menu to
calibrate the spectrum. A future data point having proper sidebands can be
used to recalibrate this measurement point, if desired.



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

1RWH

Calibration can be difficult if the motor is running below 50% load


because the actual load curve of the motor is more non-linear below
this range. If possible, always calibrate with loads greater than 50%.
Calibrating measurement points where the load is less than 50% will
often produce new FLA values (seen in the Analysis menu) that are
significantly different than found on the motor nameplate.

1RWH

Remember, calibration is required only once per measurement


point. Once a data point has been calibrated, no other data for that
measurement point need be calibrated. If another data set is calibrated, the previous calibration is lost. Calibration of one spectrum
over an initial or previous spectrum will apply to all data for that measurement point.
The calibration process picks the sideband requested by the analyst. On the analysis
menu, the message CONFIDENCE FACTOR (100%) does NOT imply that the
correct sideband has been chosen but, that the marked sideband is the one
requested by the analyst will be displayed.
Please note however, if this same spectra is selected for future evaluation, the calibrated sidebands may or may not be chosen. Refer to the section Calibration Function Key on page 3-11 for an explanation of the way the sidebands are selected. If
different sidebands are chosen, the message Different LOAD estimated from
AMPLITUDE(%) vs. SPEED(%) Verification of the located sideband is recommended will be displayed in the analysis page.
Usually when you get this message, the wrong sideband has been chosen. The
incorrect sideband was probably picked because it is the largest and has many sidebands about line frequency. The sideband is fairly close to the correct sideband, but
the correct sideband is too small compared to the incorrect (larger) sideband.

0RWRU2SWLRQ)XQFWLRQ%DU.H\V



1RWH

This message may occur even when the spectrum has been calibrated. Do not be alarmed if the expected sideband cannot be
located by MotorView. If the rotor starts to deteriorate, then the
proper sidebands will grow and MotorView will pick the correct
sidebands.



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

3RVWLQJ$ODUPVDQG)DXOWV
MotorView is a program designed to analyze data related to the electrical characteristics of motors. The program is capable of reporting on the following analysis type
components:
Flux Rotor Bar
Current Rotor Bar
Flux Stator
Thermal
Shaft Current/Voltage
Current Imbalance
The program evaluates the data and generates a severity relative to the analysis
made. The state of the motor (or severity of any given potential problem) can be
observed via two methods: Alarm status and RBMview.
Anytime data is evaluated, a severity is applied to an analysis type associated to the
measurement point. This severity for each analysis type is automatically written and
stored with the appropriate measurement point in AMS Machinery Manager. The
severity for the point can be observed on any tree display within AMS Machinery
Manager. A full explanation of the alarm status and how it relates to analyzed data
can be found in the AMS Machinery Manager manual under the Alarm Status section of chapter 2 entitled Overview of AMS Machinery Manager.
Because MotorView is a program with patented algorithms and unique analysis
capabilities, data pointing to potential problems can be stored as case histories in
RBMview. A severity, as mentioned above, will be assigned to the appropriate analysis type. If the severity is such that a fault value is exceeded, a case history will be
generated in RBMview (unless automatic problem notification is turned off).
Throughout the manual, analyses creating alarm status and case histories through
RBMview will be pointed to. In general, any data evaluated by an intelligent program can generate case histories. If only parameters are evaluated for exceeding
alert and fault levels, no case history is mapped to RBMview.

3RVWLQJ$ODUPVDQG)DXOWV



Analyzed data will always be sent to the RBMview program when the MotorView
program is configured to automatically send problem data. However, when the
MotorView program is set-up to send data to the RBMview program manually
(when the user specifies), only certain analysis options can be used. The table to
follow summarizes which analysis modes allow problem data to be sent manually
to the RBMview program.
Scenarios when Problem Data can be sent Manually to the RBMview Program

Table 1:
6FRSHRI$QDO\VLV

3ORWVWR'LVSOD\
6SHFWUXP

7UHQG

3URILOH

1RQH

6SHFLILF6SHFWUXP

<HV

1R

1R

<HV

6SHFLILF(TXLSPHQW

<HV

1R

1R

1R

6SHFLILF5RXWH

<HV

1R

1R

1R

6SHFLILF$UHD

<HV

1R

1R

1R

(QWLUH'DWDEDVH

<HV

1R

1R

1R

Data analyzed by the MotorView program (and therefore capable of being sent to
the RBMview program) include flux, current and temperature. Shaft current/
voltage measurement analysis is based on parameter values. Therefore, data from
these measurements are not sent to the RBMview program.
When in the manual problem send mode and performing a Thermal/Electrical analysis, only temperature data can be sent to the RBMview program. The
flux data evaluated as Thermal/Electrical will only be sent to the RBMview program when in the automatic problem send mode.



&RPPRQ$SSOLFDWLRQ)XQFWLRQV

&KDSWHU 

34

8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

5RWRU%DU&RQGLWLRQ0RQLWRULQJ
The MotorView I program (Rotor Bar Analysis in MotorView II) analyzes the frequency spectra of a motors electrical supply current to detect rotor-related electrical faults such as broken rotor bars, high-resistance joints, voids in aluminum cast
rotors, and cracked rotor end rings in squirrel-cage induction motors.
This frequency spectrum reflects the influence of the motors load and response
on the supply current. During each turn of the rotor, electrical signals associated
with the rotor induce currents in the stator windings. These currents appear as sidebands to the supply line frequency peak.
Fig. 4-1 shows a typical spectrum of a motor in good condition. The dominant peak
in the spectrum is the supply line frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The smaller peaks
equally spaced on either side of the line frequency peak include the sidebands used
to determine rotor bar condition.

)LJ7\SLFDOHOHFWULFFXUUHQWVSHFWUDIURPDPRWRUWKDWKDVQRREYLRXVURWRUEDUSUREOHPV



The frequency of the lower sideband which is used for the rotor bar analysis is based
on slip frequency which is determined by:

The sidebands are the result of the slip frequency multiplied by the number of
poles, and are referred to as NPxSF in this manual.
1RWH

Some sections of this manual refer to slip sidebands when mentioned, slip is defined as NPxSF (unless otherwise noted).
On a motor in good condition, the lower NPxSF sideband is typically greater than
54 dB below the amplitude level of the supply line frequency peak. As high resistance joints and broken rotor bars occur, the slip sidebands increase in amplitude
as shown in Fig 4-2. An estimate of the number of broken rotor bars can be
obtained based on the percent load, the number of rotor bars, and the ratio of the
lower sideband amplitude to the line frequency amplitude.

)LJ(OHFWULFFXUUHQWVSHFWUDIURPDPRWRUZKHUHWKH13[6)VLGHEDQGVKDYHDPSOLWXGHV
UHODWLYHWRWKHOLQHIUHTXHQF\DPSOLWXGHZKLFKLQGLFDWHWKHSUHVHQFHRIURWRUEDUSUREOHPV



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

MotorView precisely locates the line frequency peak, determines its amplitude, and
calculates the location of the sidebands. The program then determines the amplitude of the lower sideband, performs the calculations necessary to estimate the
number of broken rotor bars, and displays an appropriate diagnostic message.
All motors have load curves specific to their design (see Fig. 3-3, Shows the definition of the generic load curve and the way it is shifted to create the calibrated curve
when the measurement point is calibrated in MotorView. on page 3-11). With this
load curve, the speed of the motor can be estimated by knowing the line frequency
amplitude (motor supply current). However, in order to more accurately estimate
the motor speed, a calibration procedure is required. This procedure fits a load
curve (based on the nameplate information) to collected data on the associated
motor. The customized load curve is then used to determine the running speed
(future measurements on this same motor do not have to be calibrated).
For more information on calibration, see Calibration Function Key on page 3-11.



6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV
From the AMS Machinery Manager main menu, start the MotorView program by
selecting MotorView Analysis; the Motor Analysis Options menu will then be displayed. Use this menu to determine which data will be selected for plotting and
analysis and to enable automatic printing if desired.
1RWH

You can view the disclaimer screen by selecting the Help/Disclaimer


pulldown menu or pressing Ctrl-D.

Analysis Type: - Select from the following (MotorView I only has the Rotor Bar
option):
Flux Coil Analysis - evaluates spectra acquired by a flux coil to determine speed, relative rotor bar and stator conditions. (This option is not
available in MotorView I.)
Rotor Bar Analysis evaluates rotor bar condition based on an electric
current measurement.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

Thermal/Electrical allows automatic evaluation of temperature and


magnetic flux. (This option is not available in MotorView I.)
Shaft Volt/Current allows you to analyze shaft voltages and currents
as root causes for bearing and tachometer failures. (This option is not
available in MotorView I.)
Scope of Analysis: - Select from the following options:
Entire Database - All areas and respective equipment under the currently selected database will be available for analysis and plotting.
Specific Area - All equipment under the selected area (selected from
the next menu) will be available for analysis and plotting.
Specific Route - All of the equipment on a route (selected from the next
menus) will be available for analysis and plotting.
Specific Equipment - An individual piece of equipment (selected from
the next menus) will be available for analysis and plotting.
Specific Spectrum - A specific spectrum will be available for analysis
and plotting (the specific measurement point is selected from the next
menus). When looking at trend displays, this option defaults to A Specific Piece Of Equipment selection.
Limit Point IDs Analyzed: - can be used to group and/or limit the points to be
plotted based on the three-character measurement point IDs.
Include - only those points that match the specified IDs will be analyzed.
Exclude - only those points that do not match the specified IDs will be analyzed.
Off - all points in the Scope of Analysis will be included.
When using this feature, a measurement point ID has to pass the criteria of either
the 1st Point ID or the 2nd Point ID before being included/excluded in the analysis. (If the 2nd Point ID field is blank, then only the 1st Point ID field is used.)
Actual characters from the measurement point IDs can be used in these fields as
well as wildcard symbols. A ? to represent any single character, and an * to represent a string of characters.

6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV



For example:
5""

ZLOOSORWDOOSRLQWVZLWKDQ5LQWKHILUVWSRVLWLRQ

""

ZLOOSORWDOOSRLQWVZLWKDLQWKHODVWSRVLWLRQ

1RWH

Each measurement point will be matched and plotted only once


even if it passes the specified criteria in more than one grouping.

1RWH

Even if a measurement point matches the specified ID, MotorView


will not evaluate electrical current measurements unless the Units
Type Code is Current.
Data of Interest: - Selection 4 of this option further limits the data that will be
plotted. Select from the following:
Data from Last Survey Only - Data will be plotted only if it was collected during the last survey.
Latest Data Available - The most recently collected data will be plotted.
All Available Data - All data that applies to the specified criteria of this
menu will be plotted.
Data Between Specified Dates - Only data that falls between the
Starting & Ending Date parameters will be plotted.
Automatic Output Enabled: - Selecting this option enables automatic hardcopy
each plot or analysis screen displayed on the computer monitor is copied to an
output destination such as a line printer, plotter, screen, disk file, export file, or previewer without further attention. The plots that are printed are determined by the
settings defined under Equipment Set of Interest, Limit Point IDs Allowed,
and Select the Data of Interest. The output destination is chosen by selecting
File and Output Destination from any of the MotorView Options menus.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

To disable the automatic hardcopy, toggle the box to be blank and each plot will be
displayed only on the computer screen. Clicking on OK, clicking the right mouse
button, or pressing the Enter key while displaying a plot will advance the display to
the associated results listing.
Hard copies of any single plot or listing displayed in this mode can be generated
manually by pressing the Printer icon or, images of the screen can be sent to the
clipboard by pressing the PrtSc key on the computer keyboard.
When you have filled in the fields on the Motor Analysis Options menu,
accepting the screen should advance you to a set of screens where you select the
particular area, route, piece of equipment, or measurement point for analysis. Your
selection for The Equipment Set of Interest field determines the exact fields you
see. After choosing and accepting the appropriate devices from these screens, you
will advance to the Motor Current Display Options menu, which is discussed in
the following section.

0RWRU9LHZ*OREDO3DUDPHWHUV
Globals - Select Globals (from the Function bar or Tools pulldown menu) on the
Motor Analysis Options screen to access the Definition of Global Parameters menu
(menu is also available from the Display Options screen). This menu is used to alter
program characteristics that affect some of the various displays.
1RWH

Line frequency for AC induction and variable frequency motors is


defined as a Global parameter. For more information, refer to
Defining MotorView Global Parameters on page 3-2.
Auto>Prob / Manual>Prob - This button toggles. You select either manual or automatic writing of case histories (problems) to RBMview. If the Auto>Prob button is
displayed, then you can send case histories manually from the analysis summary
page by pressing the Send Problem button. If the Manual>Prob button is displayed,
case histories are automatically sent to RBMview without any further user intervention, but only when the corresponding measurement points are in alarm.

6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV



1RWH

You may now specify a separate unit mode for motor current, motor
flux, shaft voltage, and shaft current. If you select the unit mode to be
dB for any of these measurement types, you may also specify a separate dB reference value.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV
MotorView analyzes the collected current spectral data and then produces the
results either:
Manually, enabling you to step through and display the data on the computer screen, or
Automatically, the program selects and prints (or plots) the data without
user intervention.
For each spectrum that passes the established user-defined criteria, MotorView will
display or print in the following order:
1. . . The spectral plot
2. . . The Results of Rotor Bar Analysis list
3. . . The waveform plot
Spectral and/or waveform plots can be omitted from the analysis sequence, if
desired. Also, the results can be displayed as a trend plot or parameter profile plot.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV
The Motor Current Display Options menu is provided to select various options that
will be used when analyzing, displaying, and plotting the selected spectra.

Compareto Reference Spectrum: - Enable to include the reference spectrum


values on each analysis results list. Disable to only list the currently selected spectrum. If the selected data of interest is between specified dates (Option 4 from
Select Data of Interest) and the reference spectrum does not fall between the
starting and ending dates, the reference spectrum will not be displayed.
Plotsto Display: - Select Spectrum to display (and print, if applicable) the spectral plot associated with each analysis results list. Select None to display only the
analysis results list. Select Trend to obtain a trend of the rotor bar condition for
specific motor(s). To obtain a visual look at the rotor status as seen for a particular
point, select the Profile option. See Performing Rotor Bar Analysis on page 4-20
for additional information.
ReportExceptional Data Only: - Select this option to limit the data that is reported
according to the following conditions:



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

Lower NPxSFSideband: - A threshold is established below the amplitude of the line frequency peak of each spectrum. This level is equal to
the line frequency amplitude of each individual spectrum minus the
amplitude value specified for Lower Slip Sideband (NPxSF). All
spectra containing NPxSF sidebands that exceed this level will be
reported.
ChangeFrom Reference: - A level is established above the amplitude
of the NPxSF sideband of the reference spectrum. This level is equal to
the amplitude value of the sideband in the reference spectrum plus the
value specified for Change From Reference. All spectra containing
NPxSF sidebands that exceed this level will be reported.
Ratioto Line Freq Amplitude: - when selected, the amplitude of the line frequency peak of each plotted spectrum will be normalized to an arbitrary value
specified in the Normalized LF Amplitude entry. This causes all line frequency
peaks to appear at the same amplitude level on the plot and is useful when displaying and comparing many plots. Answer No to utilize the actual line frequency
amplitudes of each individual plot.
NormalizedLF Amplitude: - If Ratio to Line Freq Amplitude is
selected, specify the desired value that will be used for all line frequency amplitude peaks. A value of 60 dB (or 1000 if using an engineering unit) is the recommended value.
CalculatePercent Current Imbalance: - If data for all three current phases was
acquired within a 30 minute interval, any electric current imbalance can be
observed by enabling this option. A current imbalance analysis can be performed
on spectral and trend evaluations only.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



$[LV2SWLRQV

Units For FrequencyAxis: - Select Hz, CPM, or Orders (multiples of normalizing


frequency or running speed) for the frequency axis of the spectral plot.
Fixed FrequencyScale Enabled? - when not selected, the program automatically
scales the frequency range of the plot. When selected, you must define the lower
and upper frequency values (in the units specified in Units For Frequency Axis)
that will be used for the plot.
Fixed AmplitudeScale Enabled? - when not selected, the program automatically
scales the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, you must define the lower
and upper amplitude values that will be used for the plot.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

'LVSOD\2SWLRQV

Mark Slip x Poles Sidebands? - Click in the box to put a check mark. This will

include dotted lines on the spectral plot. These dotted lines indicate the frequency
location of the NPxSF sidebands as chosen by the MotorView program. Fig 4-3
shows an electric current spectra with the NPxSF sidebands marked with dotted
lines.

)LJ(OHFWULFFXUUHQWVSHFWUDZLWK13[6)VLGHEDQGVPDUNHGE\GRWWHGOLQHV

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



Grid LinesOn Plot? - places a grid overlay on the displayed spectral plot.

List PeaksBelow Spectrum? - includes a list, following each plot, of the highest
peaks within the spectrum (up to the Number of Peaks to Locate).
Number of Peaksto Locate: - specifies the maximum number of peak
values that will be listed after the spectral plot is displayed.
PeaksThreshold (dB down or %FS): - specifies the lowest peak amplitude
value that will be listed if List Peaks Below Spectrum has been selected or
the Peak List key is pressed while viewing a spectrum. If the unit mode for
current measurements is dB Units, the peak amplitude is entered as a
decibel value below the full automatic output scale value of the amplitude
axis. If the unit mode selected in Globals for current measurements is an
engineering unit (RMS, PK, P-P, or AVG), the value is entered as a percentage of the full-scale value of the amplitude axis.
LabelPeaks on Spectrum? - places labels on frequency peaks of the plotted spectrum. The number of peaks that will be labeled is determined by the Numberof
Peaks to Label variable.
DisplayAssociated Waveform: - plot associated waveforms (if available) immediately following each analysis results listing.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

$ODUP/HYHOV
The Alarm tab allows you to define alarm limits for MotorViews calculated parameters. Since these alarms are for calculated parameters, the alarms cannot be
defined with Alarm Limit Sets (as is normally done). The following sections provide explanations of how to set and display Rotor Bar parameter alarm limits.

DisplayFault/Alert/Warning Level: marks the levels to be displayed on trend


plots. Fault is the most severe alarm, Alert is less severe, and Warning is the least
severe of the three alarm levels.
RotorBar Alarms ... the three alarm levels defined under this heading are used
as alarm levels for the Rotor Bar parameter related to the low frequency analysis of
a high resolution electric current point RB1, or the equivalent point assigned to a
Unit Type Code of Current.
The rotor bar parameter is calculated as the decibel difference between the line frequency amplitude and the NPxSF sideband associated with rotor bar condition. If
the unit mode selected in Globals for current measurements is an engineering
unit (not a dB unit), this parameter is the RMS ratio of the line frequency amplitude to the NPxSF sideband associated with rotor bar condition.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



Percent Current Imbalance The three alarm levels defined under this heading
allow the user to set alarm limits for the current imbalance parameter that can be
calculated by the MotorView software.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

:DYHIRUP'LVSOD\2SWLRQV
If the Display Time Waveform? option (Display Options page of the Motor Current
Display Options menu) has been answered Yes, this menu will be displayed in
order to set up the waveform display options.

UnitsFor Time Axis: - toggle between Time and Revolutions.

DisplaySubset of Waveform? - when selected, allows you to specify a time segment that will be taken from the overall waveform, expanded, and then plotted.
The Start Position and Final Position of the time segment are entered in milliseconds. When not selected, will plot the waveforms entire time span.
FixedAmplitude Scale Enabled? - when not selected, instructs the program to
automatically scale the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, enables you to
define the lower and upper amplitude values that will be used for the plot.
MarkNormalizing Frequency? - includes vertical lines on the plot at intervals corresponding to the speed of the motor.
GridLines on Plot? - places a grid overlay on the displayed waveform plot.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



9DULDEOH)UHTXHQF\0RWRU$QDO\VLV
Rotor bar analysis of variable frequency motors follows the same rules as analysis of
AC induction motors except that the line frequency is not typically 50 or 60 Hz. On
an AC induction motor, the rated speed and full load amps (FLA) are based on line
frequency at 50 or 60 Hz (European or USA) and rated voltage. All these parameters are stated as nameplate data. On a variable frequency motor, nameplate data
varies with the change in line frequency. A change in line frequency will change the
voltage supplied to the motor. Therefore, the FLA of the motor changes. Also, the
rated speed of the motor changes proportionately with the change in the line frequency.
When MotorView determines speed from an electric current measurement, it
relies heavily on the full load amps and rated speed. MotorView determines the
amplitude of the line frequency spectral peak and divides this value by the FLA to
initially estimate the percent load. Given this percent load, the running speed is estimated relative to the rated speed. Because FLA and rated speed change with line
frequency on a variable frequency motor, estimation of speed is more difficult
because the true FLA and rated speed are not known at line frequencies not displayed on the nameplate.
MotorView evaluates variable frequency motors by one of two methods. Either
method requires the motor to be defined as variable frequency. This is accomplished in FRQCAL (the frequency calculation program) or in Component
Design Studio. When the motor is created in FRQCAL, simply define the Motor
Type as Variable Freq. Then when creating the measurement point be sure to
use a fault frequency type MTRC and point to the variable frequency motor. See
Creating Measurement Points for MotorView on page 2-1 for more detailed
information.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

The first method for evaluating variable frequency motors assumes that the line frequency peak is the largest peak in the spectrum and that the relationship between
changes in line frequency, FLA, and running speed are linear. Therefore, MotorView will locate the largest peak and use it as the line frequency peak. Having found
the new line frequency, the synchronous speed of the motor is calculated and a new
rated speed is determined based on the same percent slip of synchronous speed at
50/60 Hz. Full load amps is calculated as the ratio of the new line frequency to 50/
60 Hz times the FLA at 50/60 Hz. MotorView will apply this method of evaluation
provided the motor is defined as variable frequency (in the motor file or Component Design Studio) and the line frequency is defined in the Globals menu (see
Defining MotorView Global Parameters on page 3-2) as 50 or 60 Hz.
The second method for evaluating variable frequency motors requires the analyst
to enter the actual line frequency in the Globals menu. MotorView, provided the
motor is defined as variable frequency, then locates the entered line frequency
and uses the procedure described in the previous paragraph to locate the proper
NPxSF sidebands.
1RWH

The motor must be running at a constant speed (load) during the


measurement period to obtain reliable data. If the speed is varying,
the peaks in the spectrum are not definitive and appear smeared.
Therefore, location of line frequency and NPxSF sidebands is nearly
impossible.

9DULDEOH)UHTXHQF\0RWRU$QDO\VLV



3HUIRUPLQJ5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV
To acquire electric current data, the current probe, attached to the machinery analyzer, is clamped around any one of the conductors carrying supply line current to
the motor or a conductor from a permanent current transformer clamped around
the supply line. Permanent current transformers are usually installed on motors
larger than 575 volts. Electrical current spectral data are acquired using the normal
data acquisition procedures of the machinery analyzer. After this information has
been transferred to the AMS Machinery Manager database, induction motor analysis can be performed by selecting the MotorView program from AMS Machinery
Managers main menu.
1RWH

If electric current phase imbalance analysis is desired, current from


each of the three phases must be acquired.
A variety of options are available to limit the analyzed data. For example, the data
can be obtained individually from a specific piece of equipment, area, route, or
from the entire database. In addition, data can be selected by date, last survey, or
measurement point ID.
MotorView can also be set to report exceptional data only. With this option, an individual spectrum will only be displayed or printed if the sideband amplitudes
increase by a user-specified amount as compared to a reference spectrum, or if the
sideband amplitudes exceed a specified level below the line frequency peak.
:DUQLQJ

The voltage rating on the clamp-on current transformers distributed


by CSI is 600 volts. Therefore, CSI does not recommend that you use
these current transformers on conductors carrying more than 600
volts. If your application has more than 600 volts, CSI recommends that
you monitor currents off the secondary side of a permanently installed
current transformer.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

After Selecting Motor Analysis Options on page 4-4 and Setting Display Options
on page 4-9 have been completed and accepted, the software is ready to perform a
rotor bar analysis. Remember, your selection on the Motor Current Display
Options screen (see below) determines whether the analysis produces a:
Spectrum,
Text,
Trend report showing the results, or
Parameter Profile
The choice is determined by the Plots to Display? selection.

Examples for each type display are shown on the following pages.

3HUIRUPLQJ5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV



'LVSOD\LQJ6SHFWUDDQG$QDO\VHV
A screen similar to Fig 4-4 will be displayed if Plots to Display? on the Motor Current Display Options screen was set to Spectrum.

)LJ(OHFWULFFXUUHQWVSHFWUDZLWK13[6)VLGHEDQGVLGHQWLILHGE\0RWRU9LHZPDUNHGE\
GRWWHGOLQHV

The way to proceed from this screen depends on whether you have previously analyzed current data on this measurement point. If this is the first electric current
spectral measurement on this point, you should follow the calibration procedure
(available from the Calibration Function bar key see Calibration Function Key
on page 3-11). Briefly, the calibration procedure will create a calibrated load curve
which MotorView will then use on subsequent measurements made on this point.
One spectrum from each electric current measurement point should be calibrated.
If this measurement point has been calibrated on a previous spectrum, you can
move on to the analysis screens. As mentioned in the section Calibration Function
Key on page 3-11, there are cases where MotorView will not identify the correct
NPxSF sideband, even after calibration has been performed. The two most
common problems are: (1) there is simply no NPxSF sideband peak in the spectrum and (2) there are many large sideband peaks about line frequency (normally
induced by torsional loads acting back upon the motor).



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

To obtain a proper analysis for a spectrum when the program does not locate the
correct NPxSF sideband peak, you should identify the proper NPxSF peak of the
spectrum. To do this, use one of the three locate speed options under Set RPM: (1)
NPxSF sideband (2) Speed Sideband or (3) Running Speed. If the Save Any Modified RPM (in the Globals menu) option was turned on prior to performing the
locate speed function, the subsequent analysis of this spectrum will identify the sidebands based on the speed you stored for the spectrum.

5HVXOWVRI5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV
Results of MotorViews analysis for each selected spectrum are displayed and/or
plotted on the Results of Rotor Bar Analysis list (Fig 4-5 is an example). This list
provides information concerning the measured data, the amount of current imbalance (if desired), an estimate of the number of broken rotor bars, and an advisory
recommendation specifying what action should be taken on the motor being
tested.

)LJ5HVXOWVRI5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLVVFUHHQGLVSOD\LQJUHVXOWVRIHOHFWULFFXUUHQWDQDO\VLVIRU
URWRUEDUFRQGLWLRQ

3HUIRUPLQJ5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV



Nameplate data are displayed if the measurement point is set up correctly with an
MTRC fault frequency or if the motor has been configured using CSIs Component Design Studio program. A message will appear below the nameplate data indicating the status of calibration. If the current imbalance is desired, the calculated
current imbalance will be displayed below the calibration message.
1RWH

If Compare to Reference Spectrum on the Motor Current Display


Options menu has been selected, the results list will show both the
values from the reference spectrum and the values from the selected
comparison spectrum.
Date/Time - The date and time that the data for the currently selected spectrum
was collected.
RPS/RPM - The measured RPS or RPM of the motor at the time data was collected.
This speed is calculated based on the sidebands found by MotorView. Data is shown
in RPS or RPM according to the RPM Options selected in Globals. See RPM
Options on page 3-2 for more information.
%Load - The calculated load of the motor (in percent) at the time data were collected. The load is based on a linear relationship of the speed selected by MotorView relative to the nameplate full load speed.
Amps - The amplitude of the line frequency peak is displayed here. This is the measured current being drawn from the motor.
LF-NPxSF - This value is the frequency at which the lower NPxSF sideband peak
occurs.
Slip - This value is the slip frequency, as selected by MotorView, corresponding to
the measured RPM.
Confd - This percentage value represents the confidence factor with which the program located the slip frequency. Values of less than 50% indicate the program may
not have selected the correct slip frequency and the user may wish to inspect the
data and/or manually specify the NPxSF sideband frequency. The confidence
factor is often low when little or no sidebands, related to the true NPxSF are
present.
LF - NPxSF Amplitude - The amplitude of the lower NPxSF sideband peak.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

Line Freq Amplitude - The amplitude of the line frequency peak.


1RWH

If Ratio to Line Frequency on the Analysis Options page of the


Motor Current Display Options menu has been selected, LF - NPxSF
Amplitude and Line Freq Amplitude will be displayed in normalized
values.
Calc. Delta/Calc. Ratio - This field will appear as Calc. Delta if you specified the
unit mode for current measurements as dB in Globals. If you selected an engineering unit as the unit mode in Globals, then Calc. Ratio would appear. The
Calculated Delta value is the ratio of the amplitude values of the lower NPxSF
sideband to the line frequency peak (expressed in dB units). This value is equal to
the line frequency amplitude minus the LF - NPxSF amplitude. The Calculated
Ratio value is the ratio of the amplitude values of the lower NPxSF sideband to the
line frequency peak.
Adjusted Delta - Provides an estimate of the ratio between line frequency and the
lower NPxSF sideband as if the motor were running at 100% load.
Estimated Broken Bars - Provides an estimate of the number of broken rotor bars
based on the adjusted delta ratio. This estimate compensates for the actual operating load of the motor being tested. However, the best indicator of rotor condition
is the adjusted delta value.
1RWH

The adjusted delta value is the most reliable indicator of rotor bar
condition. In general, values greater than 54 dB indicate the rotor is
in good condition. Values between 54 dB and 45 dB generally point
to high resistant joints in barred rotors and voids in aluminium cast
rotors. Broken bars are indicated when the adjusted delta is less than
45 dB. Be concerned when the delta value reaches 35 dB or less.

3HUIRUPLQJ5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV



$QDO\VLV0HVVDJHV

One of these messages appears at the bottom of the Analysis page if one of the following problems occur. They are:
1 . . Confidence Factor (%) of the located slip sideband is marginal appears
if the confidence factor is below 50%. If this message appears, make sure the
correct sidebands are found.
2 . . The peak at () has an amplitude of (). This is larger than the slip
sidebands located appears if there are sidebands larger than the ones
picked by MotorView. If this appears, make sure the correct sidebands are
selected.
3. . . There are two ways to estimate load. One way is to compare the amplitude of
the line frequency with the full load amps (FLA) of the motor. The other way
is to compare the actual running speed (which is calculated from the
sidebands MotorView picks) to the rated speed. If the values obtained from
the two load prediction methods are not equal Different LOAD estimated
from AMPLITUDE (%) vs. SPEED (%) verification of the located
sideband is recommended appears, which means the load estimated by the
amplitude at line frequency does not equal that estimated by speed.
Usually when you get this message, the wrong sideband has been chosen. The
incorrect sideband was probably picked because it is the largest and has
many sidebands about the line frequency. The sideband is fairly close to the
correct sideband, but the correct sideband is too small compared to the
incorrect (larger) sideband.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

1RWH

This message may occur even when the spectrum has been calibrated. Do not be alarmed if the expected sideband cannot be
located by MotorView. If the rotor starts to deteriorate, then the
proper sidebands will grow and MotorView will pick the correct
sidebands. If sidebands are manually located and the Save RPM flag
is enabled, the selected sidebands will always be chosen regardless of
calibration. See Calibration Function Key on page 3-11 for additional information.
4. . . If you have located the NPxSF sidebands manually, the following message
appears: Note: CONFIDENCE FACTOR 100% does NOT imply that the
correct sideband has been chosen but that the marked sideband is the one
requested. As the message implies, before taking a motor off-line to repair
broken bars, ensure that the correct sidebands were selected.
sure that the correct sidebands were chosen.

&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR5%0YLHZ
When performing rotor bar analysis on a current spectrum, there are two problem
types that can be sent to RBMview. The first is related to rotor bar faults; the second
is excessive current imbalance.
If the analysis type of Current Rotor Bar or Current Imbalance do not exceed
fault levels, then a case history or problem is not sent to RBMview. However, if a fault
is exceeded, the problem is sent to RBMview and the status of the point reflects this
alarm state.

4XLFN(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
This evaluation method greatly expedites rotor bar diagnosis. Provided motors
have previously been calibrated, you can acquire data all day and get an analysis on
the days work within minutes.
As shown in Fig 4-6, the results of rotor bar analysis are listed for each selected spectrum, along with those of the reference spectrum, if desired. When Plots to Display is set to None, the listing shows all information pertinent to the analysis of
a particular spectrum including the estimated number of broken rotor bars and an
advisory recommendation.

3HUIRUPLQJ5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV



In this mode, analyses can be calculated quickly without showing associated spectra.
With this option, an entire route or database can be evaluated in a matter of minutes.

)LJ([DPSOHRITXLFNHYDOXDWLRQRXWSXWRIHOHFWULFFXUUHQWVSHFWUDODQDO\VLVIRUURWRUEDU
IDXOWVSHUIRUPHGE\0RWRU9LHZ

Measurement Point lists the equipment ID and measurement point ID for each
spectral analysis displayed in the report.
Spectrum Date Time lists the date and time of collection for the spectral data
which was analyzed for each of the measurement points.
Speed RPS/RPM the speed calculated by MotorView based on the sidebands it
located, or which were manually located by the user. Data is shown in RPS or RPM
according to the setup in the Globals menu.
% Full Load the calculated load of the motor (in percent) at the time data were
collected. The load is based on a linear relationship of the speed selected by MotorView relative to the nameplate full load speed.



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

Slip Conf - This percentage value represents the confidence factor with which the
program located the slip frequency. Values of less than 50% indicate that the program may not have selected the correct slip frequency and the user may wish to
inspect the data and/or manually specify the NPxSF sideband frequency. The confidence factor is often low when little or no sidebands, related to the true NPxSF are
present.
Adjusted dB Delta - the calculated difference in amplitude between the line frequency peak and the lower NPxSF sideband (after the amplitude of the NPxSF
sideband was adjusted to infer the motor was running at 100% load). This number
is expressed in dB.
Broken Bars Severity The number of broken bars that MotorView infers to
exist in the motor is based upon the 100% Delta value and the number of bars
assigned to the motor in the motor component database. The meaning of the
severity code is defined in detail at the end of the Results of Rotor Bar Analysis
report.
The >Pk code will appear (as seen for Pulverizer 1A) when a peak larger than the
selected NPxSF peak is present. If this message appears, make sure the correct sidebands were selected. This code is often present for motors which have large torsional loads produced by units such as gear boxes, belt and gear drives. The
torsional loads produce sidebands at their associated frequencies. These torsional
load sidebands are often larger than the NPxSF sideband peaks.
The >X% message will occur in the % Full Load column for two reasons. First, if
the estimated load is greater than 115%, then the entry under the % Full Load
column will be >115%. The second reason for this message to occur is because a
different load is estimated from the line frequency amplitude than from the calculated speed.

3HUIRUPLQJ5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV



7UHQG(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
Analysis of the rotor bar condition for a particular motor can be visually displayed
as a trend plot by selecting Trend for the Plots to Display field. By selecting the
Trend option, two plots will be displayed. A third plot will be displayed if evaluation of current imbalance is desired. The first trend (shown in Fig. 4-7) plots the
time of the collected data versus the rotor bar condition which is the value of the
line frequency amplitude minus the NPxSF sideband amplitude. In general, the
amplitude of the data points of this plot will decrease with increased degradation of
the rotor bar. The plot in Fig. 4-7 increases with time because the motor had broken
rotor bars when first measured. The last point shows an increase because the motor
was rebarred.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRIUDWLRRIHOHFWULFFXUUHQWOLQHIUHTXHQF\SHDNDPSOLWXGHWRORZHU13[6)
VLGHEDQGDPSOLWXGH GLVSOD\HGKHUHLQG%$PSV



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

The second plot generated with the Trend option is shown in Fig. 4-8. This trend
plots the time of the collected data versus the number of estimated broken rotor
bars. In general, the amplitude of this plot will increase with an increase in rotor bar
degradation. The plot in Fig. 4-8 decreases with time because the motor upon first
measurement had broken rotor bars. The last point shows a decrease because the
motor was rebarred.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRI0RWRU9LHZVHVWLPDWHRIWKHQXPEHURIEURNHQURWRUEDUVLQDPRWRU
EDVHGRQHOHFWULFFXUUHQWVSHFWUDODQDO\VLV

1RWH

A minimum of two measurements must be taken on a measurement


point (within the time window displayed) to enable MotorView to
create a trend plot.

3HUIRUPLQJ5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV



The third (optional) plot generated is shown in Fig. 4-9. This trend plots the calculated current imbalance for each measurement period versus time. Keep in mind,
current imbalance levels will be greater than voltage imbalance levels.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRIWKHFDOFXODWHGFXUUHQWLPEDODQFHIRUHDFKPHDVXUHPHQWSHULRGYHUVXV
WLPH



8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

3DUDPHWHU3URILOH(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
A bar chart graph showing the rotor bar condition for any particular motor, for any
electric current data, can be viewed by selecting Profile in the Plots to Display
field. The purpose for displaying this graph is to allow the user to quickly look at a
point and know if the rotor is in a good or alarm condition. The rotor condition is
plotted based on a percent of fault condition. An example of such a plot is shown
in Fig. 4-10. For more information on general setup and options pertaining to Profile plot, see the Diagnostic Plotting (PLOTDATA) chapter in the AMS Machinery
Manager VibView Reference Manual.

)LJ3DUDPHWHU3URILOHSORWVKRZLQJD+3PRWRUZLWKDURWRUEDUFRQGLWLRQLQDODUP

1RWH

If the rotor bar condition is in alarm, it is highly recommended that


the appropriate data be reviewed in detail through spectral analysis to
verify the results

3HUIRUPLQJ5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV





8VLQJWKH0RWRU9LHZ,3URJUDP 5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV

&KDSWHU 

72

)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

2YHUYLHZ
An electric motor by definition produces magnetic flux. Any small unbalance in
the magnetic or electric circuit of motors is reflected in the axially transmitted
fluxes [1]. Because electrical characteristics within a motor change due to asymmetries in the rotor or stator windings, so does the axially transmitted flux. Electrical
characteristics that can produce asymmetries are broken rotor bars, unbalanced
phases and anomalies in the stator windings such as turn-to-turn, phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground shorts to name a few.
Axially transmitted flux measurements can be acquired with a flux coil (CSI Model
343). The Flux Analysis option in MotorView II can then be used to evaluate the
electrical characteristics of AC induction motors. A trend of certain magnetic flux
measurement frequencies acquired from a FFT will indicate electrical asymmetries
associated with the rotor and stator windings.
Fig 5-1 displays a typical flux spectrum. The majority of the peaks in a flux coil spectrum occur at frequencies which have some relationship to running speed. MotorView uses these speed relationships in a patented algorithm to automatically
determine running speed. By knowing the running speed, an estimate of the load
can be derived and entered into the normalized thermal parameter calculation to
be discussed in Chapter 7. In addition, changes in speed related peaks provide
strong indication of electrical faults such as broken rotor bars, unbalance voltages
and stator insulation breakdown.



)LJ+LJKUHVROXWLRQORZIUHTXHQF\VSHFWUXPZLWKWKHGRWWHGOLQHVLQGLFDWLQJWKH13[6)
VLGHEDQGV DERXWWKHOLQHIUHTXHQF\ LGHQWLILHGE\0RWRU9LHZ7KHSHDNVPDUNHGE\[DUH
UXQQLQJVSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWWKHOLQHIUHTXHQF\

In Fig 5-1, the dotted lines indicate NPxSF sidebands about line frequency. The
peaks marked with an x indicate sidebands about line frequency occurring at
running speed intervals.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

0HDVXUHPHQW/RFDWLRQDQG0HWKRGV
Consistent placement of a formed flux coil on the axial outboard end of the motor
is critical for obtaining reliable and trendable data. It is important that the measurement be taken at the same location, with the same spacing between the sensor and
motor, and without swinging or twisting movement of the flux coil.
To collect reliable and trendable data, the measurement position should be
marked and data acquired at this same location for each evaluation. It is recommended that flux measurements be acquired axially at a centered position.
Figure 2-2 illustrates the position of ideal placement. If the flux coil can not be centered, it should be placed at an off-centered axial position as close as possible to
center. To mark the motor for repeatable flux coil placement, place the flux coil on
the motor using the three magnetized feet to hold it in place. Then, draw the outline of the CSI 343 flux coil on the endshield of the motor.
If the endshield is made of aluminum, three steel sensor pads (CSI 901) should be
attached as a mark for the flux coil placement and to allow for the magnetic
mounting of the flux coil. Otherwise, the flux coil must be held (by hand) on the
endshield at a painted mark.
To take measurements with the flux coil, simply connect the CSI 343 Flux Coil to
the machinery analyzer via the appropriate cable. Then place the sensor on the
location of the motor previously marked for this measurement.

0HDVXUHPHQW/RFDWLRQDQG0HWKRGV



1RWH

Ensure that there is no movement in the flux coil and that the coil
does not vibrate excessively. Excessive vibration will cause noise in the
flux spectrum making it impossible to produce reliable trend data.
An example of bad, noisy data is illustrated in Fig. 5-2.

)LJ)OX[VSHFWUXPLOOXVWUDWLQJWKHYLVLEOHDSSHDUDQFHRIQRLV\GDWDFROOHFWLRQLQGLFDWHG
E\WKHPRXQGRIHQHUJ\DERYH+]



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

0DJQHWLF)OX[$QDO\VLV
The flux analysis capabilities of MotorView II provide diagnosis of rotor bar related
faults, and indications of other anomalies related to the stator and voltage unbalance. The analysis for these faults is performed by inspection of two flux spectra.
The low frequency spectrum is a high resolution spectrum with a maximum frequency of at least three times running speed, or two times line frequency (whichever is greater). In practice, for 2-pole, 4-pole, and >4-pole motors, setup DBASE uses 185,
155, and 125 Hz bandwidths, respectively. Analysis of this spectrum provides information on the rotor condition, changes in voltage balance and some stator fault detection. The high frequency spectrum contains slot pass family frequencies which
provide indication of stator related faults. The maximum frequency for these
spectra is at least the principal slot pass (PSP) plus 15 times line frequency. Principal
slot pass (PSP) equals the number of rotor bars (or stator slots) times running
speed, minus line frequency ((#RBxSPEED)-LF). Detailed descriptions and discussions of these spectra and their analysis follow.

5RWRU%DU$QDO\VLV
The flux coil spectrum has been shown to provide information on rotor bar condition. Flux spectrum frequencies associated with rotor bar condition occur at the
number of poles times slip frequency (NPxSF) sidebands about line frequency
(just as seen in electric current measurements). Like electric current analysis, the
condition of the rotor depends on the amplitude difference between the line frequency and the NPxSF sideband to the low frequency side of line frequency. In
electric current analysis, specific amplitude differences have been shown to be
related to known levels of rotor bar severity. However, the amplitude difference
relating to the flux coil measurement may differ from that of the electric current
measurement. While the amplitude differences of the flux measurements may
not be the same as found from current measurements, the relative difference
between line frequency and the appropriate NPxSF sideband has been found to
decrease at the same rate (for both spectra) as the rotor degrades.

0DJQHWLF)OX[$QDO\VLV



Because the amplitude difference from a reference flux measurement and a reference electric current measurement may differ, one electric current measurement is recommended for baseline purposes. If a reference electric current
measurement is acquired, MotorView will retrieve the flux coil rotor bar analysis
related to a calibrated electric current measurement and normalize flux measurements relative to this. In order to relate the flux spectra with the calibrated electric
current spectra, Save any Modified Spectrum RPM? selection in the Globals,
then RPM Options menu must be checked when evaluating both the reference
current and flux measurement points.
1RWH

CSI recommends that the flux and electric current data used for the
relative calibration be acquired on the same day.

1RWH

Flux measurements will not provide information pertaining to the


true amplitude of the line frequency peak as acquired from electric
current data. All measurements are relative measurements intended
for trending.

&DXWLRQ

Flux and electric current measurement trends provide a signal which changes
with developing rotor bar faults. The flux signal shows some dependence on
voltage unbalance and stator faults. If the flux parameter begins to rise, and
trips alarm levels (signaling rotor bar faults), always verify these observations
with a supplemental electric current spectral analysis before scheduling the motor
for rotor bar repair.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

/RZ)UHTXHQF\)OX[&RPSDULVRQ
In order to detect stator faults and voltage unbalances through trending, each low
frequency flux spectrum is compared to the reference flux spectrum. MotorView
does this by using a sophisticated algorithm capable of comparing harmonic multiples of any peak and sideband families about any peak. After the reference flux
spectrum is displayed and the rotor analysis is performed, a new screen will display
specific comparison spectral peaks that exceed a user-defined threshold. This
threshold is calculated relative to the reference spectrum. Detailed information on
setting these thresholds will be discussed in the Envelope Alarms section, beginning on page 5-28.
To illustrate the use of low frequency flux comparisons, two case histories are provided. The first case history demonstrates the observation of a voltage unbalance
while the second case history involves a turn-to-turn short in the stator of a 50 HP
motor.
8QEDODQFHG9ROWDJH6XSSO\

Unbalanced supply voltage will cause motor heating and eventually lead to premature degradation of the stator windings. The flux measurement provides an easy
method to determine changes in supply voltage balance. You can trend changes in
the voltage balance by observing the peak at

In this equation, LF is line frequency (Hz), NP is number of poles, and RPS is the
speed of the motor (Hz).

0DJQHWLF)OX[$QDO\VLV



Figures 5-3 and 5-4 are flux spectra taken on the outboard center position of a five
HP, 2-pole motor. Unbalance voltage levels are 0% and 5% for Figures 5-3 and 5-4
respectively. Both spectra are similar in appearance except for the amplitude of the
1xRPM sideband about line frequency (the sideband is to the right of line frequency at 118.34 Hz in Fig. 5-3). Because of the increased voltage unbalance from
0% to 5%, this voltage unbalance peak increased by 10.6 dB (an increase of 3.6
times). As the voltage unbalance was further increased, the amplitude of the
voltage unbalance peak continued to increase.

)LJ)OX[VSHFWUXPRI+3PRWRUZLWKYROWDJHXQEDODQFH7KHODEHOHGSHDNVDUH
UXQQLQJVSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

)LJ)OX[VSHFWUXPRI+3PRWRUZLWKYROWDJHXQEDODQFH7KHODEHOHGSHDNVDUH
UXQQLQJVSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\

0DJQHWLF)OX[$QDO\VLV



MotorView evaluated and compared corresponding peaks in the reference and


comparison spectra. The analysis screen (Fig 5-5) indicates peaks in the comparison spectrum larger than those in the reference spectrum. Notice MotorView indicated that the peak indicative of changes in voltage unbalance (
=
118.10 Hz) increased significantly.

)LJ5HVXOWVRI)OX[6SHFWUD&RPSDULVRQVVKRZVWKHORZIUHTXHQF\DQDO\VLVRIIOX[
VSHFWUDDSSOLHGWRWKHGDWDVKRZQLQ)LJDQG7KHVSHFWUXPVKRZQLQ)LJLV
HYDOXDWHGDVWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

6KRUWHG:LQGLQJ7XUQV

One of the first faults a winding will encounter is turn-to-turn shorts. These faults
will then migrate into phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground shorts. The spectra in
Figs. 5-6 and 5-7 were determined from flux coil data taken on a 50 HP motor. Fig.
5-6 shows a spectrum representing a measurement taken from the motor in good
condition. The spectrum displayed in Fig. 5-7 represents the same motor but with
a faulted turn-to-turn short in the stator windings. In both figures, the labeled peaks
occur at running speed sidebands about line frequency. These peaks occur at frequencies associated with unsymmetrical winding faults. The amplitude values of
the running speed sideband peaks in the faulted stator condition are significantly
larger than those found for the stator in good condition.

)LJ)LIW\KRUVHSRZHUPRWRUZLWKVWDWRULQJRRGFRQGLWLRQ/DEHOHGSHDNVDUHUXQQLQJ
VSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\

0DJQHWLF)OX[$QDO\VLV



)LJ)LIW\KRUVHSRZHUPRWRUZLWKVKRUWVLQVWDWRUZLQGLQJV/DEHOHGSHDNVDUHUXQQLQJ
VSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

MotorView evaluated and compared corresponding peaks in the reference and


comparison spectra. The analysis screen (Fig. 5-8) indicates peaks in the comparison spectrum larger than those in the reference spectrum. The peaks that are
marked indicate stator degradation as well as voltage imbalance. Notice that these
peaks showed possible significant increases in amplitude.

)LJ7KLVVFUHHQGLVSOD\VWKHFRPSDULVRQEHWZHHQWKHWZRVSHFWUDVKRZQLQ)LJDQG
7KHVSHFWUXPLQ)LJLVWUHDWHGDVWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP

0DJQHWLF)OX[$QDO\VLV



+LJK)UHTXHQF\)OX[$QDO\VLV
Changes have been detected in the electrical characteristics of electric motors
which indicate turn-to-turn shorts by looking at the family of slot pass frequencies
from measurements taken with a flux coil. Flux measurements are acquired using
a spectrum analyzer. After a FFT is performed on a measurement, the resulting signature is analyzed at the slot pass frequencies. The principal slot pass (PSP) frequency occurs at either the product of the number of rotor bars (RB) and running
speed, minus line frequency ((#RB x RPS) LF) or the product of the number of
stator slots (SS) and running speed, minus line frequency ((#SS x RPS) LF). A
family of slot pass frequencies occurs at the principal slot pass frequency
[2xNxLF] where LF = line frequency (Hz) and N = 0,1,2,3.... This particular family
of frequencies will be termed the 2xLF family of slot pass frequencies. Modulating about each of these 2xLF family of slot pass frequencies (peaks) will be multiples of running speed sidebands and multiples of slip frequency sidebands. Line
frequency sidebands have also been observed modulating about the 2xLF family
peaks. These sideband frequencies are collectively termed sideband family of slot
pass frequencies (peaks). The combination of the 2xLF family of slot pass frequencies, the multiples of running speed and slip frequency sidebands as well as
line frequency sidebands will be termed the slot pass family of frequencies
(peaks).
This analysis technique involves comparing spectra over time (trending) and
determining when changes occur in components of the slot pass family of frequencies. Also, mathematical combinations of certain members or subsets of peaks
within the slot pass family of peaks (i.e. 2xLF family and running speed sideband
family) are trended for significant changes in their values. The example to follow
will illustrate some of the abilities of this technique.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

+LJK)UHTXHQF\)OX[&DVH+LVWRU\

An induction motor had 28 rotor bars and was running at approximately 83% of
full load. The motor was evaluated with the stator in good condition (no fault) and
with shorted windings which produced a turn-to-turn short (faulted condition).
The line frequency supplying the motor was 59.97 Hz. The speed of the motor in
the good and faulted condition was 29.32 and 29.31 Hz, respectively. Therefore, the
principal slot pass frequency as calculated with rotor bars is 760.99 Hz ((28x29.32)
59.97) for the motor in good condition and 760.71 Hz ((28x29.31) 59.97) for
the motor with a stator winding short. Plots displaying the slot pass family for this
motor are shown in Figs. 5-9 and 5-10 for the good and faulted conditions respectively. The principal slot pass frequency is easily identified in each figure. Note that
the principal slot pass frequencies are slightly different than calculated due to the
fact that the speed and line frequency values are reliable only within 1/100th of a
Hertz. The analysis screen (Fig. 5-11) displays a set of the slot pass frequency peaks
which show significant change in amplitude. Labeled peaks in Figs. 5-9 and 5-10 are
seen on the analysis screen and show the basis for the technique. Only peaks with
significant change are shown. Marked frequency values are indicators of possible
degradation.

)LJ3DUWRIWKHIUHTXHQF\VSHFWUXPRIDQ$&LQGXFWLRQPRWRU ZLWKQRVWDWRUIDXOWV 
FROOHFWHGDVDKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[VSHFWUXP7KHODEHOHGSHDNVLQGLFDWHWKHSULQFLSDOVORW
SDVVDQG[OLQHIUHTXHQF\VLGHEDQGV

0DJQHWLF)OX[$QDO\VLV



)LJ3DUWRIWKHIUHTXHQF\VSHFWUXPRIDQ$&LQGXFWLRQPRWRU ZLWKWXUQWRWXUQVKRUWV
LQWKHVWDWRU FROOHFWHGDVDKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[VSHFWUXP7KHODEHOHGSHDNVLQGLFDWHWKH
SULQFLSDOVORWSDVVDQG[OLQHIUHTXHQF\VLGHEDQGV

)LJ7KLVVFUHHQVKRZVWKHFRPSDULVRQRIWKHWZRKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[VSHFWUDVKRZQ
LQ)LJDQG7KHVSHFWUXPLQ)LJLVWUHDWHGDVWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP7KLVGLVSOD\
RQO\OLVWVSHDNVZKLFKKDYHH[KLELWHGDXVHUVSHFLILHGFKDQJHEHWZHHQWKHFRPSDULVRQDQG
UHIHUHQFHVSHFWUD



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

1RWH

It should also be noted, since each member of the slot pass family of
peaks is considered for assessing electrical asymmetry in the stator,
the exact number of rotor bars or stator slots is not necessary. The slot
pass family of peaks is easily discernible in the flux spectrum. Therefore the painful task of determining the exact number of rotor bars
and stator slots is less important.

0DJQHWLF)OX[$QDO\VLV



6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV
From the AMS Machinery Manager main menu (under the header Diagnostics
and Reporting), start the MotorView program by selecting MotorView Analysis.
The Motor Analysis Options menu will then be displayed. Use this menu to determine which data will be selected for plotting and analysis and to specify automatic
printing.

Analysis: - Select from the following (MotorView I only has the Rotor Bar option):
Flux Coil Analysis evaluates spectra acquired by a flux coil to determine speed, relative rotor bar and stator conditions.
Rotor Bar Analysis evaluates rotor bar condition based on an electric
current measurement.
Thermal/Electrical allows automatic evaluation of temperature and
magnetic flux.
Shaft Volt/Current allows you to analyze shaft voltages and currents
as root causes for bearing and tachometer failures.
Scope of Search: - Select from the following options:



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

The Entire Database - All areas and respective equipment under the
currently selected database will be available for analysis and plotting.
A Specific Area - All equipment under the selected area (selected from
the next menu) will be available for analysis and plotting.
A Specific Route - All of the equipment on a route (selected from the
next menus) will be available for analysis and plotting.
A Specific Equipment - An individual piece of equipment (selected
from the next menus) will be available for analysis and plotting.
A Specific Spectrum - A specific spectrum will be available for analysis and plotting (the specific measurement point is selected from the
next menus). When looking at trend displays, this option defaults to A
Specific Piece Of Equipment selection.
Limit Point IDs Analyzed: - can be used to group and/or limit the points to be
analyzed based on the three-character measurement point IDs. By selecting
Include, only those points that match the specified IDs will be analyzed. By
selecting Exclude, only those points that do not match the specified IDs will be
analyzed. Select Off to disable this feature.
When using this feature, a measurement point ID has to pass the criteria of either
the 1st Point ID or the 2nd Point ID before being included/excluded in the analysis. (If the 2nd Point ID field is blank, then only the 1st Point ID field is used.)
Actual characters from the measurement point IDs can be used in these fields as
well as the wildcard symbols. A ? represents any single character, and an * represents a string of characters.
For example:
)""

ZLOOSORWDOOSRLQWVZLWKDQ)LQWKHILUVWSRVLWLRQ

""

ZLOOSORWDOOSRLQWVZLWKDLQWKHODVWSRVLWLRQ

1RWH

Each measurement point will be matched and analyzed only once


even if it does pass the specified criteria in another grouping.
Data of Interest: - select from the following:

6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV



Last Survey Only - Data will be analyzed only if it was collected during
the last survey.
Latest Available - The most recently collected data will be analyzed.
All Available Data - All data that applies to the specified criteria of this
menu will be analyzed.
Between Specified Dates - Only data that falls between the Starting &
Ending Date parameters will be analyzed (further limits the data that
will be analyzed).
Automatic Output Enabled: - Selecting this option enables automatic hardcopy
each plot or analysis screen displayed on the computer monitor is copied to an
output destination such as a line printer, plotter, screen, disk file, export file, or previewer without further attention. The plots that are printed are determined by the
settings defined under Equipment Set of Interest, Limit Point IDs Allowed,
and Select the Data of Interest. The output destination is chosen by selecting
File and Output Destination from any of the MotorView Options menus.
To disable the automatic hardcopy, toggle the box to be blank and each plot will be
displayed only on the computer screen. Clicking on OK, clicking the right mouse
button, or pressing the Enter key while displaying a plot will advance the display to
the associated results listing.
Hard copies of any single plot or listing displayed in this mode can be generated
manually by pressing the Printer icon or, images of the screen can be sent to the
clipboard by pressing the PrtSc key on the computer keyboard.
When you have filled in the fields on the Motor Analysis Options menu,
accepting the screen should advance you to a set of screens where you select the
particular area, route, piece of equipment, or measurement point for analysis. Your
selection for The Equipment Set of Interest field determines the exact fields you
see. After choosing and accepting the appropriate devices from these screens, you
will advance to the FluxCoil Analysis Options menu, which is discussed in the following section.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

0RWRU9LHZ*OREDO3DUDPHWHUV
Globals - Click Globals on the Analysis Options screen to access the Definition of
Global Parameters menu (menu is also available from the Display Options screen).
This menu is used to alter program characteristics that affect some of the various
displays.
1RWH

Line frequency for AC induction and variable frequency motors is


defined as a Global parameter. For more information, refer to
Defining MotorView Global Parameters on page 3-2.
Auto>Prob / Manual>Prob - This button toggles. You select either manual or automatic writing of case histories (problems) to RBMview. If the Auto>Prob button is
displayed, then you can manually send case histories from the analysis summary
page by pressing the Send Problem button. If the Manual>Prob button is displayed,
case histories are automatically sent to RBMview without any further user intervention, but only when the corresponding measurement points are in alarm.
1RWH

You may now specify a separate unit mode for motor current, motor
flux, shaft voltage, and shaft current. If you select the unit mode to be
dB for any of these measurement types, you may also specify a separate dB reference value.

6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV



6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV
MotorView analyzes the collected flux spectral data and then produces the results
either:
Manually, enabling you to step through and display the data on the computer screen, or
Automatically, the program selects and prints (or plots) the data without
operator intervention (this option is performed when you select Yes for
Automatic Output Enabled).
Spectral and/or waveform plots can be omitted from the analysis sequence, if
desired. Also, the results can be displayed as a trend or parameter profile plot.

)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV0HQXV
The Flux Coil Analysis Options menu is provided to select various options that will
be used when analyzing, displaying, and plotting the selected spectra.
$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV

FluxEvaluation: - While highlighted, toggle the space bar to select one of these
options:



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

1RWH

For Low and High Frequency analysis, the measurement points


Units Type Code must be set up as described below with AMS
Machinery Managers Database Utility. See the AMS Machinery Manager Technical Reference for more information about setting up individual measurement points.
Low Frequency allows MotorView to analyze only low frequency
measurement points (points having a Units Type Code of Flux/Low
Freq). Low frequency measurement points contain information on
rotor bar condition, voltage unbalance, and some stator anomalies.
High Frequency allows MotorView to analyze only high frequency
spectra (points having a Units Type Code of Flux/Slot Pass). High
frequency spectra provide indications of stator-related faults.
Full Analysis allows MotorView to evaluate both Low and High Frequency.
Plotsto Display: - Select Spectrum to display (and print, if applicable) the spectral plot associated with each analysis results list. Select None to display only the
analysis results list. Select Trend to obtain trend analysis plots. The low frequency
flux data will trend rotor and stator related parameters. The high frequency flux
data will trend stator related parameters. To obtain a visual look at the electrical
status of a particular motor, select the Profile option. See Performing Flux Coil
Analysis on page 5-38 for additional information.
CurrentReference Point ID: - Enter the three letter identifier of the electric current measurement point. This measurement point is the one used as the baseline
for the flux measurement point(s) being evaluated.
Report ExceptionalRotor Bar Data Only? - This option only applies to low frequency flux data (F?1) high frequency data is not affected. When selected, limits
the data that is reported (related to rotor bar analysis) according to the following
conditions:
LowerNPxSF Sideband: - A threshold is established below the line
frequency amplitude peak of each spectrum. This level is equal to the
line frequency amplitude of each individual spectrum minus the amplitude value specified for Lower Slip Sideband (NPxSF). All spectra
containing NPxSF sidebands that exceed this level will be reported.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



ChangeFrom Reference: - A level is established above the NPxSF


sideband amplitude of the reference spectrum. This level is equal to the
amplitude value of the sideband in the reference spectrum plus the
value specified for Change From Reference. All spectra containing
NPxSF sidebands that exceed this level will be reported.
HighFrequency Search Method: - allows you to select either of two methods for
analyzing slot pass frequency flux data. If the number of rotor bars and stator slots
is known, select Nameplate. This will let MotorView know which frequencies to be
located for analysis. If the number of rotor bars and stator slots is not known, select
Algorithm (this instructs MotorView to use its algorithm to determine the slot
pass frequencies).
Derive SpeedFrom Low Frequency: - To locate the slot pass family of
peaks, MotorView must know the running speed and/or principal slot pass
frequency. If MotorView has a difficult time determining the slot pass
family or speed, marking this option can help in determining the correct
frequencies. When enabled, each high frequency spectra will view the
associated low frequency spectra to derive its speed. If the associated low
frequency spectra was not acquired within thirty minutes of the high frequency spectrum, the analysis of the particular data is performed as if this
option was not enabled. For more information about how the slot pass frequencies are located, see High Frequency Flux Coil Analysis on page
5-57.
1RWH

This option is only valid if the low frequency data has been evaluated
prior to the high frequency flux data. In addition, the speeds of the
low frequency data must have been saved with each data point by
enabling the Save any Modified RPM option in the globals menu
(see Defining MotorView Global Parameters on page 3-2 for more
information).



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

1RWH

If MotorView continues to have problems determining speed and


slot pass frequencies (even after trying different combinations of the
above two options), try selecting a different Slot Pass Flux Factor
(selected from the Globals menu.) For an explanation of this factor,
see Defining MotorView Global Parameters on page 3-2.
$[LV2SWLRQV

UnitsFor Frequency Axis: - select Hz, CPM, or Orders (multiples of normalizing


frequency or running speed) for the frequency axis of the spectral plot.
FixedFrequency Scale Enabled? - when not selected, the program automatically
scales the frequency range of the plot. When selected, a definition of the lower and
upper frequency values (in the units specified in Units For Frequency Axis) that will
be used for the plot should be entered.
1RWH

When displaying both low frequency (F?1) and high frequency (F?2),
set this option to No. Failure to do so may prevent you from viewing
all of the data.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



FixedAmplitude Scale Enabled? - when not selected, the program automatically


scales the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, the two fields that follow display the definition of the ranges lower and upper amplitudes.
'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

MarkSlip x Poles Sidebands: - includes dotted lines on low frequency spectral


plots. These dotted lines indicate the frequency location of the NPxSF sidebands as
chosen by the MotorView program.

)LJ$ORZIUHTXHQF\IOX[VSHFWUXPGLVSOD\HGE\0RWRU9LHZZLWKWKH13[6)
VLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\ DVLGHQWLILHGE\0RWRU9LHZ PDUNHGZLWKGRWWHGOLQHV

AbbreviatedHigh Flux Trend Summary: - If this field is enabled, only one trend
summarizing the 2xLF family of slot pass frequencies and one trend summarizing the running speed family of slot pass frequencies will be plotted. If this is
not enabled, 3 trends pertaining to the 2xLF family of slot pass frequencies and
3 trends pertaining to the running speed family of slot pass frequencies will be
separately displayed.
GridLines On Plot? - places a grid overlay on the displayed spectral plot.

ListPeaks Below Spectrum? - includes a list, following each plot, of the highest
peaks within the spectrum (up to the Number of Peaks to Locate).
Numberof Peaks to Locate: - specifies the maximum number of peak
values that will be listed after the spectral plot is displayed.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



PeaksThreshold (dB down or %FS): - specifies the lowest peak amplitude


value that will be listed if List Peaks Below Spectrum has been answered
Yes, or if you click on the Peak List button while viewing a spectrum. If
the Unit Mode (Motor Flux field on the Engr. Units tab in Globals) is specified as dB Units, the peak amplitude is entered as a decibel value below
the full-scale value of the amplitude axis. If specified as an engineering unit
(RMS, Peak, Peak-to-Peak, Average), then the value is entered as a percentage of the full-scale value of the amplitude axis.
LabelPeaks on Spectrum? - allows you to place labels on the frequency peaks of
the plotted spectrum. The number of peaks that will be labeled is determined by
the Numberof Peaks to Label variable.

DisplayAssociated Waveform: - Answer Yes to plot associated waveforms (if


available) immediately following each analysis results listing.
(QYHORSH$ODUPV

The following fields are used to define a separate Envelope Alarm for each peak
included in the comparison to those peaks found in the reference spectrum.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

MinAbsolute Limit: - This field establishes the minimum alarm value which can
be applied to a given peak. Depending on the Units Mode selected for flux measurements, this minimum alarm value is defined as either a dB down value from the
amplitude of the reference line frequency peak or a percentage value of the amplitude of the reference line frequency peak.
MaxAbsolute Limit: - This field establishes the maximum alarm value which can
be applied to a given peak. This value is defined as a percentage value multiplied by
the amplitude of the reference line frequency.
PeakSize Breakpoint: - This break point distinguishes between large and small
peaks. Any peak whose amplitude is less than this value is defined as small. Any peak
whose amplitude is greater than this value is defined as large. This field determines
which of the following two alarm values will be applied to a peak in the comparison
spectrum. Different alarm criteria are applied to large or small peaks in order to set
the most appropriate alarm level.
BigPeak Percent Alarm: The percentage value entered for this alarm will
be multiplied by the amplitude of the corresponding peak in the reference
spectrum. It is designed to indicate an alarm based on a smaller change
compared with the Small Peak Percent Alarm.
SmallPeak Percent Alarm: The percentage entered for this alarm will be
multiplied by the amplitude of the corresponding peak in the reference
spectrum. It is designed to allow smaller peaks to change more before they
indicate an alarm condition.
Consider this example:
- The reference line frequency amplitude is 30 dB flux-au [31.63 flux-au
(RMS)].
- In the reference spectrum, the peak of interest has an amplitude of
20 dB flux-au [0.1 flux-au (RMS)].
- The Min Absolute Limit is the reference line frequency amplitude (30 dB)
minus 60 dB: 30 60 = 30 dB flux-au.
- The Max Absolute Limit is equal to 150% of the RMS value of the reference line frequency amplitude: 150% x 31.63/100 = 47.43 flux-au (RMS) or
33.5 dB flux-au.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



- The Peak Size Breakpoint is equal to the reference line frequency amplitude (30 dB) minus 55 dB: 30 55 = 25.0 dB flux-au [0.056 flux-au
(RMS)].
- the Big Peak Percent Alarm is equal to 150% of the RMS value of the
comparison peak: 150 x 0.1/100 = 0.15 flux-au (RMS)
or 16.5 dB flux-au.
- the Small Peak Percent Alarm is equal to 500% of the RMS value of
the comparison peak: 500 x 0.1/100 = 0.5 flux-au (RMS)
or 6.0 dB flux-au.
- The peak of interest has an amplitude of 10 dB flux-au [0.32 flux-au
(RMS)] in the comparison spectrum.
Note that this peak (10 dB) is above the Peak Size Breakpoint value (-25 dB).
Therefore, it will be considered a big peak. Consequently, the Big Peak Percent
Alarm will be proposed. If this proposed alarm was below the Min Absolute Limit,
then the Min Absolute Limit would be used. If the proposed alarm was above the
Max Absolute Limit, then the Max Absolute Limit would be used. However, in
this case, the Big Peak Percent Alarm is the most appropriate, so it will be the
alarm limit that is applied to the peak of interest in the comparison spectrum. Evaluating the comparison peak of -10 dB flux-au to the alarm limit of -16.5 dB flux-au
shows that the peak is in alarm, and the report would indicate that the peak is 210%
of the limit value [(0.32/0.15) x 100%].



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

7UHQG3URILOH$ODUPV

The Trend/Profile Alarms tab defines alarm limits for MotorViews calculated
parameters. Since these alarms are for calculated parameters, the alarms cannot be
defined with Alarm Limit Sets (as is normally done). The following sections provide explanations of how to set and display Flux parameter alarm limits.

Trend Plot Alarms...


DisplayFault/Alert/Warning Level: - checking one or more of these
options causes the selected alarm levels to be displayed on trend plots.
Fault is the most severe alarm, Alert is less severe, and Warning is the least
severe of the three alarm levels.
RotorBar Alarms - the three alarms defined under this heading are used as
alarms for the Flux Rotor Bar parameter related to the low frequency flux coil analysis of high resolution flux points F?1.
The rotor bar parameter is calculated as the decibel difference between the line frequency amplitude and the NPxSF sideband associated with rotor bar condition. If
the Unit Mode for flux measurements is not dB (Motor Flux field, Engr. Units tab,
Globals menu), then this parameter is the RMS ratio of the line frequency amplitude to the NPxSF sideband associated with rotor bar condition.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



If a reference electric current measurement has been collected and calibrated for
a corresponding flux measurement (see Magnetic Flux Analysis on page 5-5) the
alarm levels are compared against the flux coil data, normalized to the corresponding electric current measurement. If an electric current measurement has
not been collected and calibrated, the alarms are applied to the raw flux coil data
itself.
Flux Alarms - The remaining three alarms use different values, defined similarly,
to calculate Warning, Alert, and Fault alarms for each parameter.
Line Frequency Alarms: This alarm is a dual upper alarm. The line frequency amplitude for the data samples associated with the low frequency
flux point are calculated and displayed in a trend plot, if Trend is the type
of output that is selected.
Flux Electrical Condition Alarms: This alarm is a dual upper alarm. Flux
electrical condition is a parameter which gives a measure of the spectral
energy in the running speed sidebands about line frequency. The parameter
is derived by:
1. . . Squaring the amplitudes for each running speed sideband about line
frequency,
2. . . Summing these squared values,
3. . . Taking the square root of the summed value
Flux Slot Pass Alarms: This alarm is a dual upper alarm. The Flux Slot
Pass parameter refers to parameters which measure the spectral energy in
part of either of two sideband families of peaks about principal slot pass
frequency. One family is the 2xLF sidebands. The other is the family of
RPS (or running speed sidebands) about any of the other 2xLF sidebands.
The actual parameter value for each sideband family is calculated by the
square root of the sum of the squares of the amplitudes of any sideband
peaks in the comparison spectrum which are either larger or smaller than
the corresponding peaks in the reference spectrum. This number is normalized by dividing by the Reference Slot Pass Energy (see Ref. Slot Pass
Energy Sum this number (RMS) is calculated by adding the squared
amplitude of each identified slot pass family peak in the Reference spectrum, and taking the square root of the summed value. on page 5-61).



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

Threshold Values - Threshold values entered for the following fields will be applied
to the line frequency flux electrical condition or either of the flux slot pass
parameters. MotorView provides default values for all of these parameters. CSI cautions that you carefully understand how the parameters are defined so that you
make appropriate changes to the levels.
Absolute:The number entered here is the value to be assigned as the upper
Fault level for these parameters. If the alarm levels computed from the
Percent of Average and the Maximum Percent Delta values are
smaller, the larger of these two will be set to the Fault level. The fault value
is set to zero if the Absolute value is less than the alarm level computed
from the Minimum Absolute.
Flux parameters that are amplitude ratios are dimensionless.
Percentof Average: The number entered in this field (as a percent) is
applied to the average flux parameters. The average flux parameter is calculated (for these flux parameters) similar to the way AMS Machinery
Manager calculates average values (for analysis parameters defined within
DBASE). The average is determined over the number of points equal to
the number of data values in statistical calculation, which is set on the
measurement point definition screen. The amplitude for the alarms is calculated as:

This amplitude is compared with the amplitude value calculated by the


Maximum Percent Delta field, and the smaller of these two levels is chosen
as the upper alert level with the requirement that the alert level must be
greater than or equal to the alarm level calculated from the Minimum Percent Absolute value.
MaximumPercent Delta: The number in this field (expressed as a percent)
multiplied by the average parameter value is added to the average parameter value to obtain an Upper limit Alarm:

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



MinimumPercent Absolute: The number in this field is the minimum percent alarm threshold level for the different parameters. It is calculated as:

The alarm level values (when being calculated) are compared to this value,
and if they are smaller than this minimum threshold, are set equal to the
minimum threshold.
StandardDeviation: The number in this field is used in conjunction with standard deviations calculated for the different parameters, to calculate a warning level.
This warning level is calculated as:
6WG'HYV[&DOFXODWHG6WDQGDUG'HYRI3DUDP $YHUDJH)OX[3DUDPHWHU9DOXH
The calculated Standard Dev is calculated from parameter values similar to the way
AMS Machinery Manager calculates statistical values. The number of measurements equal to the number of data values in statistical calculation are used to calculate the average parameter value. This same set of measurements is used to
calculate the Calculated Standard Deviation of the Parameter values with respect to
their Calculated Average Parameter value. This warning level is then compared
with the Alert level and, provided it is smaller, is set as the Warning level. If the Standard Deviation value is larger than the Alert value, the Warning alarm is set to zero
(or ignored).



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

:DYHIRUP'LVSOD\2SWLRQV
If the Display Associated Waveform option (Display Options page of the Flux Coil
Analysis Option menu) has been selected, this menu will be displayed in order to
set up the waveform display options.



Units for Time Axis: - toggle between Time and Revolutions.


Display Subset of Waveform? - when selected, allows you to specify a time segment
that will be taken from the overall waveform, expanded, and then plotted. The
Start Position and Final Position of the time segment are entered in milliseconds.
When not selected, the waveforms entire time span will be plotted.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled? - when selected, permits the definition of a fixed
amplitude scale (determined by the Lower and Upper Scale values) for each waveform plot. When not selected, the program will use automatic amplitude scaling.
Mark Normalizing Frequency? - includes vertical lines on the plot at intervals corresponding to the speed of the motor.
Grid Lines on Plot? - places a grid overlay on the displayed waveform plot.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



)OX[$QDO\VLVRQ9DULDEOH)UHTXHQF\0RWRUV 9)0
Analysis of Variable Frequency Motors (VFM) follows the same rules as analysis of
AC induction motors except that the line frequency is not typically 50 or 60 Hz.
Although actual voltage and current amplitudes have little effect on rotor bar analysis of VFMs, changes in line frequency do affect running speed. The rated speed
of the motor changes proportionately with the change in the line frequency.
Changes in the voltage and current levels can affect the flux intensities therefore,
when trending flux data on VFMs, the line frequency needs to be the same in order
for measurements to be compared effectively (for stator related anomalies).
When MotorView determines speed from a flux coil measurement, it relies heavily
on the sidebands about line frequency. Therefore, choosing the correct line frequency peak is essential.
MotorView evaluates variable frequency motors by one of two methods. Either
method requires the motor to be defined as variable frequency. This can be accomplished in the program FRQCAL. When the motor is created in FRQCAL, simply
define the Motor Type as Variable Freq. Then when creating the measurement
point be sure to use a fault frequency type MTRC and point to the variable frequency motor. See Chapter 2, Creating Measurement Points for MotorView, for
more detailed information.
RBMwizard can also be used to create a variable frequency motor and configure
the Equipment based on this component. MotorView will then recognize the
Equipment to be variable frequency.
The first method for evaluating variable frequency motors assumes that the line frequency peak is the largest peak in the spectrum and that the relationship between
changes in line frequency, full load amps (FLA), and running speed are linear.
MotorView will locate the largest peak in the spectrum being analyzed and use it as
the line frequency peak. This peak thus defines the line frequency for this spectra.
Given the line frequency, the synchronous speed of the motor is calculated and a
new rated speed is determined based on the same percent slip of synchronous
speed at 50/60 Hz. MotorView will apply this method of evaluation provided the
motor is defined as variable frequency and the line frequency is defined in the Globals menu (see Defining MotorView Global Parameters on page 3-2) as 50 or 60
Hz.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

The second method for evaluating variable frequency motors requires the analyst
to enter the actual line frequency in the Globals menu. MotorView, provided the
motor is defined as variable frequency, then locates the entered line frequency
and uses the procedure described in the previous paragraph to locate the proper
NPxSF sidebands. Because the line frequency peak may not always be the largest
peak in a flux spectrum acquired on a VFM, this method is usually required and
is more reliable.
1RWH

The motor must be running at a constant speed (load) during the


measurement period to obtain reliable data. If the speed is varying,
the peaks in the spectrum are not definitive and appear smeared.
Therefore, location of line frequency and NPxSF sidebands is nearly
impossible.

)OX[$QDO\VLVRQ9DULDEOH)UHTXHQF\0RWRUV 9)0



3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV
To acquire flux coil data, the flux coil (CSI 343), attached to the machinery analyzer, is placed on the axial end of the motor (see Measurement Location and
Methods on page 5-3 for detailed measurement guidelines). Flux coil spectral data
are acquired using the normal data acquisition procedures of the machinery analyzer. After this information has been transferred to the AMS Machinery Manager
database, induction motor analysis can be performed by selecting MotorView from
AMS Machinery Managers main menu.
A variety of options are available to limit the analyzed data. For example, the data
can be obtained individually from a specific piece of equipment, area, route, or
from the entire database. In addition, data can be selected by date, last survey, or
measurement point ID.
MotorView can also be set to report exceptional data only. With this option, an individual spectrum will only be displayed or printed if the NPxSF sidebands about line
frequency increase in amplitude by a user-specified amount as compared to a reference spectrum, or if the sideband amplitudes exceed a specified level below the
line frequency peak.
After Selecting Motor Analysis Options on page 5-18 has been completed (and
accepted), and Flux Coil Analysis Options Menus on page 5-22 has been completed, you are ready to perform a flux analysis. Accepting the Flux Coil Analysis
Options menu will produce either a spectrum, text, trend, or parameter profile
summarizing the results. The following pages show examples of each (determined
by your selection after Flux Evaluation and Plots to Display?).



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

1RWH

Since analysis of most electrical anomalies is based on trend changes


relative to a reference data point, reference data is always analyzed.



3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



/RZ)UHTXHQF\$QDO\VLV
As discussed at the beginning of this chapter, low frequency flux analysis provides
indications of rotor bar condition, voltage unbalance and stator degradation. To
best illustrate MotorViews analysis displays, options and procedures, this section is
divided into categories covering (1) analysis of rotor bar condition and (2) changes
in the flux spectrum indicative of stator related anomalies.
When the Plots to Display menu is set to Spectrum, the general display of MotorView's analysis on low frequency data is as follows:
1. . . Plot reference spectral data (reference data only displayed before the first
comparison spectra being analyzed).
2. . . Display Results of Rotor Bar Analysis for the reference spectra.
3. . . Display peak comparison list (defined with envelope options), listing
comparison spectral peaks differing substantially from corresponding
reference spectral peaks.
4. . . Plot comparison spectral data.
5. . . Display Results of Rotor Bar Analysis for the comparison spectra.
/RZ)UHTXHQF\$QDO\VLV

Rotor bar analysis and spectral comparisons for stator anomalies will be performed
on flux data provided the Flux Evaluation option on the Flux Coil Analysis
Options menu is set to either Low Frequency or Full Analysis. Analysis displays
and options specific to rotor bar condition and flux comparisons are illustrated in
the following sections.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

'LVSOD\LQJ6SHFWUDDQG$QDO\VHV
A screen similar to Fig 5-13 will be displayed if Plots to Display? on the Flux Coil
Analysis Options tab was set to Spectrum.

)LJ3DUWRIWKHORZIUHTXHQF\IOX[VSHFWUXPGLVSOD\HGE\0RWRU9LHZLQWKHSURFHVVRI
DQDO\]LQJIOX[FRLOGDWDIRUURWRUEDUIDXOWV ZKHQ\RXKDYHVHOHFWHG6SHFWUXPIRUWKH3ORWV
7R'LVSOD\ILHOGRQWKHIOX[FRLODQDO\VLVRSWLRQVPHQX 

For optimum functionality with MotorView, the Save any Modified RPM? option
in the Globals menu should be answered Yes (at least for the reference spectrum). This will allow the speed found by MotorView to be saved with the spectrum.
For more information about this, see Defining MotorView Global Parameters on
page 3-2.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



Results of MotorViews analysis for each selected spectrum is displayed on the


Results of Rotor Bar Analysis screen. This screen (Fig 5-14 is an example) provides
information concerning the measured data, an estimate of the number of broken
rotor bars, and an advisory recommendation specifying what action should be
taken on the motor being tested. The particular information in Fig 5-14 shows how
this screen would appear after the comparison spectrum has been displayed.

)LJ7KLVILJXUHVKRZVSDUWRIWKHURWRUEDUDQDO\VLVUHVXOWVIURPDQDO\VLVRIORZ
IUHTXHQF\IOX[GDWD7KHFRPSDULVRQVSHFWUXPVKRZVWKHPRWRUDIWHUIRXUEURNHQEDUVZHUH
UHSDLUHG

Nameplate data are displayed if the measurement point is set up correctly with an
MTRC fault frequency or if the Equipment has been set up with CSIs Component
Design Studio program.
1RWH

Since the amplitude values of flux data are not the same as electric
current measurements, only the rated speed is pertinent for flux analysis.
Date/Time - The date and time that the data for the currently selected spectrum
was collected.
RPS/RPM - The calculated RPS or RPM of the motor at the time data was collected. This speed is calculated based on the sidebands found by MotorView. The
speed is shown in RPS or RPM according to the setup in Globals.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

%LOAD - The calculated load of the motor (in percent) at the time data were collected. The load is based on a linear relationship of the speed selected by MotorView relative to the nameplate full load speed.
FluxAU- The amplitude of the line frequency peak is displayed here. Since the calculated flux parameters are for trend purposes only, the absolute line frequency amplitude is insignificant.
LF-NPxSF - This value is the frequency at which the lower NPxSF sideband peak
occurs.
Slip - This value is the slip frequency, as selected by MotorView, corresponding to
the measured RPM.
CONFD - This percentage value represents the confidence factor with which the
program located the slip frequency sideband. Values of less than 50% indicate that
the program may not have selected the correct slip frequency and the user may
wish to inspect the data and/or manually specify the NPxSF sideband frequency.
The confidence factor is often low when little or no sidebands, related to the true
NPxSF are present.
LF-NPxSF Amplitude - The amplitude of the lower NPxSF sideband peak, in the
flux spectrum.
Line Freq Amplitude - The amplitude of the line frequency peak, in the flux spectrum.
Calc. Delta/Calc. Ratio - This field will appear as Calc. Delta if, on the Globals/
Eng. Units menu, you selected dB units for the Unit Mode of Motor Flux. If you
had selected an engineering unit, then Calc. Ratio would appear. The Calculated Delta (expressed in dB units) value is equal to the line frequency amplitude
minus the amplitude of the lower NPxSF sideband of line frequency. The Calculated Ratio value is the ratio of the amplitude values of the line frequency peak to
the lower NPxSF sideband of line frequency.
Adjusted Delta - Provides an estimate of the ratio between line frequency and the
lower NPxSF sideband as if the motor were running at 100% load.
1RWH

This value is most accurate when a spectra of calibrated reference current data is available for baseline correction of the flux spectra.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



Estimated Broken Bars - provides an estimate of the number of broken rotor bars
based on the adjusted delta ratio. This estimate compensates for the actual operating load of the motor being tested.
$QDO\VLV0HVVDJHV

One of these messages appears at the bottom of the Analysis page if one of the following problems occur. They are:
1.. . Confidence Factor (%) of the located slip sideband is marginal appears
if the confidence factor is below 50%. If this message appears, make sure the
correct sidebands are found.
2.. . The peak at ( ) has an amplitude of ( ). This is larger than the slip
sidebands located appears if there are sidebands larger than the ones
picked by MotorView. If this appears, make sure the correct sidebands are
selected.
3.. . Note: CONFIDENCE FACTOR 100% does NOT imply that the correct
sideband has been chosen but that the marked sideband is the one
requested appears if the speed was manually located. As the message
implies, before taking a motor off-line to repair broken bars, ensure that the
correct sidebands were chosen.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

/RZ)UHTXHQF\)OX[6SHFWUDO$QDO\VLV
Before each low frequency comparison spectrum is displayed, a screen similar to
Fig 5-15 will be shown, provided there are peaks in the comparison spectra
exceeding the thresholds defined on the Envelope Options page of the Flux Coil
Analysis Option menu.

)LJ7KLVVFUHHQGLVSOD\VFRPSDULVRQVRIDQ\RIDSUHGHILQHGVHWRISHDNVIURPWZRORZ
IUHTXHQF\IOX[VSHFWUDZKHUHWKHSHDNLQWKHFRPSDULVRQVSHFWUXPH[FHHGVWKUHVKROGV
ZKLFKDUHHVWDEOLVKHGUHODWLYHWRWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP

Explanation of the column headings and results are:


Frequency (Hz/RPM) - Frequency of the comparison peak exceeding the corresponding reference peak by the amount defined on the Envelope Options page of
the Flux Coil Analysis Options menu.
Order (xRPM) - Frequency of the comparison peak divided by running speed.
Peak Value - Amplitude of the comparison peak in units as described in the header.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



Identification LF/RPS/PxS/SLP - Description for the identification of the peak. A


positive number, negative number or zero will be displayed below each of the four
columns labeled LF (line frequency), RPS (running speed), PxS (number of poles
times slip frequency), and SLP (slip frequency defined as synchronous speed
minus running speed). The number below each column is a multiplier of that
column. Each column for a particular frequency is to be added according to the
sign of the number in the column.
As an example, consider the following:
/)5363[66/3


Given: the speed of the motor is 1761.42 RPM, line frequency is 59.987
Hz, and the comparison frequency is 28.084 Hz. The synchronous speed is
calculated as 2 x 59.987 x 60/4 = 1799.61 RPM. Therefore the slip frequency is 1799.611761.42 = 38.19 RPM or in units of Hertz 0.637 Hz
(38.19/60). The PxS value is 4 x 0.637 = 2.548 Hz. All of this information
is calculated and displayed on the first line below the column listings and
labeled as (LF, RPS, PxS, SLP). Knowing these pertinent values, the identification of this example comparison peak is
;OLQHIUHTXHQF\ ;UXQQLQJVSHHG ;QXPEHURISROHV;VOLSIUHTXHQF\.

1RWH

This field will also display any other identified sidebands about line
frequency which MotorView finds.
Limit Value - The amplitude of the reference peak adjusted by the Envelope
Alarm value in units as described in the header. If no reference peak is present corresponding to the comparison peak identified, then the text No Pk is displayed
in this column.
Percent Limit - Defined as:





)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

(LF, RPS, PxS, SLIP) - Values displayed on this line are the measured line frequency (LF) in the comparison spectrum, the running speed (RPS) in the comparison spectrum, and the number of poles x slip (PxS) and slip frequency (SLIP)
for the comparison spectrum.
Total Peak Amplitude (Flux AU) - The square root of the sum of the squared
values of all peaks which MotorView identifies as part of a sideband family about
line frequency (respectively in the comparison and reference spectra).
Line Freq Amplitude (Flux AU) - The amplitude of the line frequency peak
(respectively in the comparison and reference spectra).
Total Excess Amplitude - The first value on the analysis screen is the square root of
the sum of the squares of peaks that were individually identified. The second value
on the analysis screen is the square root of the sum of the squares of the difference
between the reference and comparison peaks.
Percent Load - The load, as calculated based on the determined speed for the comparison, and reference measurements are displayed. When the load values calculated from the comparison and reference spectral data differ significantly, certain
peaks in the spectra can change due to load and not due to fault. Therefore, if the
comparison spectra changes considerably over the reference spectra, and the load
has also changed significantly, the analyst should retake the comparison data at a
load close to the load at which the reference data was collected.
If the loads differ by more than 15%, a message is displayed which reads:
7KHORDGIRUWKHPHDVXUHPHQWSRLQWLVVLJQLILFDQWO\GLIIHUHQW
WKDQWKHUHIHUHQFH%HIRUHGHFLGLQJRQWKHFRQGLWLRQRIWKH
PRWRUYHULI\DQDO\VLVE\UXQQLQJWKHPRWRUDWWKHUHIHUHQFH
ORDG

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



Running speed sideband peaks about line frequency have been found to be indicators of voltage unbalance and/or stator related problems. Any peak meeting this
criteria will be flagged beside the point. In addition, an associated recommendation will be listed at the bottom of the comparison page. The following table shows
the possible indicating flags along with explanations and/or recommendations.
)ODJ,QGLFDWRU

([SODQDWLRQ0HVVDJH

5HVHDUFKKDVVKRZQJURZWKLQWKHPDJQLWXGHRIWKLVSHDNWR
LQGLFDWHLQFUHDVHGFKDQJHLQWKHYROWDJHEDODQFH5HVHDUFKKDV
DOVRVKRZQWKDWVWDWRUIDXOWVFDQFDXVHWKLVSHDNWRLQFUHDVH

!!

5HVHDUFKKDVVKRZQJURZWKLQWKHPDJQLWXGHRIWKLVSHDNWR
LQGLFDWHLQFUHDVHGFKDQJHLQWKHYROWDJHEDODQFH

5HVHDUFKKDVFRUUHODWHGVWDWRUIDXOWVZLWKVLJQLILFDQWLQFUHDVHLQ
SHDN V ZKLFKDUHUXQQLQJVSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\
7KHDPSOLWXGHRIDQ\SHDNPDUNHG !KDVVLJQLILFDQWO\
LQFUHDVHG

5HVHDUFKKDVFRUUHODWHGVWDWRUIDXOWVZLWKVLJQLILFDQWLQFUHDVHLQ
SHDN V ZKLFKDUHUXQQLQJVSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\
%HDZDUHLIDQ\SHDNPDUNHG!LQFUHDVHVVLJQLILFDQWO\

Following this screen, the program will then display the spectral plot of the comparison spectrum, followed by a display of the Results of Rotor Bar Analysis for the
comparison spectrum.

&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR5%0YLHZ
When performing an analysis on a Low Frequency Flux Spectrum, there are two
analysis types that may be sent to RBMview. A case history is sent if fault limits are
exceeded for the Flux Stator analysis type. This calculated parameter gives indication to stator-related faults.
In addition, MotorView informs RBMview if the Flux Rotor Bar analysis type
exceeds a fault level. The flux rotor bar parameter is triggered as a case history
when rotor related problems are suspected.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

4XLFN(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
This evaluation method will greatly expedite a diagnosis. If electric current measurements have been calibrated previously, you can acquire data all day and get an
analysis on the days work within minutes.
As shown in Fig 5-16, the results of the analysis are listed for each selected spectrum,
along with those of the reference spectrum, if desired. This method is selected
when (on the Flux Coil Analysis Options menu) the Plots to Display field is set to
None. The listing shows all information pertinent to the analysis of a particular
spectrum including stator and rotor related variables.
In this mode, analyses can be calculated quickly without showing associated spectra.
With this option, an entire route can be evaluated in a matter of minutes.

)LJ([DPSOHRITXLFNHYDOXDWLRQRXWSXWRIORZIUHTXHQF\IOX[FRLOVSHFWUDOGDWDZKHQ
URWRUEDUIDXOWDQDO\VLVLVSHUIRUPHGE\0RWRU9LHZ

Equipment/Point lists the equipment ID and measurement point ID for each


spectral analysis displayed in the report.
Spectrum Date /Time lists the date and time of collection for the spectral data
which was analyzed for each of the measurement points.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



Speed the speed calculated by MotorView based on the sidebands it located, or


which were manually located by the user. The speed is shown in RPS or RPM
according to the setup in the Globals menu.
% Full Load the calculated load of the motor (in percent) at the time data were
collected. The load is based on a linear relationship of the speed selected by MotorView relative to the nameplate full load speed.
Electrical Condition (LFNxRPS where N = ..., -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, ...) the energy
(RMS) in the running speed sidebands about line frequency.
1RWH

In laboratory tests, this parameter shows a significant increase with an


increase in stator degradation.
100% Delta the calculated difference in amplitude between the line frequency
peak and the lower frequency NPxSF sideband (after the amplitude of the NPxSF
sideband was adjusted to infer the motor was running at 100% load). This number
is expressed in dB.
Broken BarsSeverity these fields list (respectively) the number of broken bars
which MotorView infers to exist in the motor based upon the 100% Delta value and
the number of bars assigned to the motor in the motor component database. The
meaning of the severity codes are defined in detail at the end of the Results of Rotor
Bar Analysis report.
A >Pk code will appear (in the Sevrty column) when a peak larger than the selected
NPxSF peak is present. If this message appears, make sure the correct sidebands
were selected. This code is often present for motors which have large torsional
loads produced by units such as gear boxes, belt and gear drives. The torsional
loads produce sidebands at their associated frequencies. These torsional load sidebands are often larger than the NPxSF sideband peaks.
A >X% message will occur in the % Full Load column if the estimated load is
greater than 115%.
1RWH

To obtain a comparison between spectra for analysis of stator anomalies, Plots to Display must be set to Spectra.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

This analysis option will also give indication of possible faults or problems. The following table shows the indicating flags along with explanations/recommendations.
These flags will appear in the Electrical Condition column for each data point
along with potential fault information.
)ODJ,QGLFDWRU

([SODQDWLRQ0HVVDJH

3RVVLEOHLQGLFDWLRQRIYROWDJHXQEDODQFH

3RVVLEOHLQGLFDWLRQRIVWDWRUUHODWHGSUREOHPV

3RVVLEOHLQGLFDWLRQRIYROWDJHXQEDODQFHDQGRUVWDWRUUHODWHG
SUREOHPV

>@

7KHOLQHIUHTXHQF\KDVFKDQJHGUHODWLYHWRWKHUHIHUHQFHOLQH
IUHTXHQF\E\WKHSHUFHQWDJHHQWHUHGLQWKH3HUFHQW2I$YHUDJH
OLQHIUHTXHQF\DODUPYDOXH

&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR5%0YLHZ
Just as with spectral analysis of flux data, the quick method can write Flux Stator
and Flux Rotor Bar case histories to RBMview. For details, see Communicating
Results to RBMview on page 5-48.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



7UHQG(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
Analysis of the rotor bar condition for a particular motor can be visually displayed
as a trend plot by selecting Trend for the Plots to Display field. By selecting the
Trend option, four plots will be displayed. The first trend (shown in Fig. 5-17)
plots the time of the collected data versus the value of the line frequency amplitude
minus the NPxSF amplitude. In general, the amplitude of the trend points on this
plot will decrease with increased degradation of the rotor bars. The plot shown in
Fig. 5-17 increases with time because the motor had broken rotor bars when first
measured. The last point shows an increase because the motor was rebarred.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRIWKHDPSOLWXGHUDWLRRIWKHOLQHIUHTXHQF\SHDNWRWKH
13[6)VLGHEDQGRQWKHORZIUHTXHQF\VLGHRIWKHOLQHIUHTXHQF\SHDN+HUHWKHUDWLRLV
GLVSOD\HGLQG%



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

The second plot generated with the Trend option is shown in Fig. 5-18. This
trend plots the time of the collected data versus the number of estimated broken
rotor bars. In general, the amplitude of the trend points on this plot will increase
with an increase in rotor bar degradation. The data in Fig 5-18 decreases with time
because the motor had broken rotor bars when first measured. The last point
shows a decrease because the motor was rebarred.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRI0RWRU9LHZVHVWLPDWHRIWKHQXPEHURIEURNHQURWRUEDUVLQDPRWRU
EDVHGRQDQDO\VLVRIORZIUHTXHQF\IOX[VSHFWUDOGDWD

The third plot generated with the Trend option is shown in Fig. 5-19. This trend
plots the time of the collected data versus a flux parameter called LFQSPD SB or
Flux Speed Sidebands. The Flux Speed Sideband parameter is a measure of the
spectral density of the running speed sidebands about line frequency. This parameter is calculated by squaring the value of each running speed sideband about line
frequency, summing these squared values, and taking the square root of the
summed number.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



1RWH

In laboratory tests, this parameter shows a significant increase with an


increase in stator degradation.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRIWKH)OX[6SHHG6LGHEDQGSDUDPHWHUZKLFKLVDPHDVXUHRIWKHVSHFWUDO
HQHUJ\LQWKHUXQQLQJVSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\

1RWH

A minimum of two measurements must be taken on a measurement


point (within the time window displayed) to enable MotorView to
create a trend plot.

1RWH

To obtain a comparison between spectra for analysis of stator anomalies, Plots to Display must be set to Spectra.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

The fourth plot generated with the Trend option is shown in Figure 5-20. This
trend plots the time of the collected data versus the amplitude of the line frequency
peak.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRIWKHWLPHRIWKHFROOHFWHGGDWDYHUVXVWKHDPSOLWXGHRIWKHOLQH
IUHTXHQF\SHDN

1RWH

For a flux measurement, a significant change in the amplitude of the


line frequency can be an indicator of an electrically related fault. The
fault is usually related to the stator.

&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR5%0YLHZ
Just as with spectral analysis of flux data, the quick method can write Flux Stator
and Flux Rotor Bar case histories to RBMview. For details, see Communicating
Results to RBMview on page 5-48.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



3DUDPHWHU3URILOH(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
A bar chart graph showing the rotor bar, electrical and stator conditions for any particular motor, for any flux data, can be viewed by selecting Profile in the Plots to
Display field. The purpose for displaying this graph is to allow the user to quickly
look at a point and know if the motor is in a good or alarm condition. The motor
condition can be plotted based on a percent of fault condition.
Analysis can be performed on low frequency flux data, slot pass frequency flux data
or both low and slot pass frequency flux data. The data to evaluate depends on a
combination of selections including Scope of Analysis and Limit Point IDs Analyzed found on the Motor Analysis Options menu and the Flux Evaluation
option found on the Flux Coil Analysis Options menu. If both the low and slot pass
frequency data is to be evaluated simultaneously and Specify Data to Profile on
the Profile Display Options menu is Selected, then the data to be chosen will be
based on the low frequency data. Therefore, in this example no high frequency
data would be evaluated, if there is not low frequency data associated with the high
frequency data of concern.
An example of a plot evaluating low frequency flux measurements is shown in Fig
5-21.

)LJ 3DUDPHWHUSURILOHSORWIRUDQDO\VLVRIORZIUHTXHQF\IOX[GDWD



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

1RWH

If the motor condition is in alarm, it is highly recommended that the


appropriate data be reviewed in detail (through spectral analysis) to
verify the results.

+LJK)UHTXHQF\)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV
As discussed at the beginning of this chapter, high frequency flux analysis of spectral peaks around the slot pass frequencies, provides an indication of stator
related anomalies. In this manual, the term slot pass is a general term that indicates rotor bar passing and/or stator slot passing frequencies. MotorView evaluates
flux data by comparing the slot pass frequencies in the reference spectra to those
found in the comparison spectra. Understanding MotorView's basic process of how
slot pass frequencies are located and how they are compared is important. To
evaluate high frequency spectra containing slot pass family frequencies, select
either High Frequency or Full Analysis as the Flux Evaluation option on the
Flux Coil Analysis Options menu.
1RWH

Selecting Full Analysis as the Flux Evaluation option will display


first low frequency then high frequency data.
If MotorView is to reliably locate the slot pass frequencies in a spectrum, these
requirements must be met:
A low frequency flux spectrum (F?1) must be acquired within 30 minutes of
the reference high frequency flux spectrum.
This low frequency flux spectrum must be analyzed prior to the reference
high frequency flux spectrum.
When the low frequency flux spectrum is evaluated, the Save RPM Flag (set
in the Globals Menu) must be selected so the located speed for the low frequency
spectrum associated with the reference high frequency spectrum can be saved.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



&DXWLRQ

If the speed of the motor changes between the time the reference high frequency
flux measurement and the low frequency flux measurement associated with it
are acquired, analysis can be unreliable and even incorrect.
Finding the slot pass family of peaks visually in a flux spectrum is simple. Referring
to the spectrum in Fig. 5-22, notice the mound of spectral energy past 700 Hz. The
large peaks in this section of the spectrum are separated by two times line frequency
and are the slot pass family of peaks. Just as you visually find these peaks, MotorView grabs these peaks, correlates their frequencies with the known speed
acquired from the associated F?1 measurement point and calculates the principal
slot pass frequency (PSP). This procedure is performed on the reference spectrum
of the high frequency measurement point. For analysis of high frequency flux
spectra (other than the reference spectra), MotorView identifies the slot pass family
of peaks and calculates the associated speed of the motor based on the identified
principal slot pass frequency if the Derive Speed from Low Frequency? option on the Flux
Coil Analysis Options menu is not marked. Otherwise, the speed from low frequency
flux analysis will be utilized to zoom in on the slot pass family of peaks.

)LJ7\SLFDOKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[FRLOVSHFWUXP1RWHWKHVSHFWUDOHQHUJ\DERYH
+]DQGWKHSURPLQHQWSHDNVVSDFHGDW[/)ZKLFKDUHVLGHEDQGVRIWKHSULQFLSDOVORWSDVV
IUHTXHQF\



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

'LVSOD\LQJ+LJK)UHTXHQF\6SHFWUDDQG$QDO\VHV

A reference spectrum followed by a comparison spectrum will be displayed if Plots


to Display? on the Flux Coil Analysis Options screen was set to Spectrum. Comparisons between reference and comparison spectra are then performed and
printed as shown in Fig. 5-23.
This analysis screen displays data for any PSP family member peak where the comparison spectrum peak differs from the corresponding reference peak by more
than the maximum percent alarm (for an increase), or
1/(maximum percent alarm) for a decrease. Peaks which show less change will not
be displayed on this analysis page.

)LJ7KLVVFUHHQVKRZVWKHFRPSDULVRQRIWZRKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[VSHFWUD$QDO\VLV
UHVXOWVDUHGLVSOD\HGIRUDQ\SULQFLSDOVORWSDVVIDPLO\VLGHEDQGSHDNZKLFKVKRZVDVLJQLILFDQW
GLIIHUHQFHEHWZHHQWKHFRPSDULVRQDQGUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUD

MotorView compares the specific slot pass family of peaks defined as:
PSP+/- 2xNxLF and 1xRPS sidebands about each of these peaks
where: N = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



Frequency (Hz) provides a description of the peak being evaluated


under the heading Identification while providing the frequency values
of these peaks for both the reference (ref. column) and comparison
(comp. column) data.
Amplitude (dB/RMS) displays the amplitudes of these peaks in both
the Reference and Comparison spectra (in units specified by the Unit
Mode field in Globals for flux measurement). If the peak is not visible
in the spectrum for one of the spectra, the magnitude of the peak will
be equivalent to the magnitude of the noise floor.
Difference (Comp Ref) (dB) displays the difference between the
amplitude of the Comparison and Reference peaks (in dB units) provided the peak was visible in both spectra.
Ratio Comp/Ref shows the same data as in the previous column,
except now, this data is expressed as a simple amplitude ratio which is
always greater than or equal to zero.
At the bottom of the screen, additional analysis is displayed for the
entire identified family of slot pass peaks, grouped in several ways.
Slot Pass Family the slot pass family peaks are grouped in two ways.
First, the 2xLF family consists of any of the PSP+/2xNxLF family of
sidebands. The second group of RPS Sidebands consist of any identified 1xRPS sidebands about any of the PSP+/2xNxLF peaks.
ComparisonReference (+ Energy) this number (RMS) is calculated
from slot pass family peaks where the comparison peaks are larger in
amplitude than the corresponding Reference peak. The difference in
amplitude of each such peak is squared, then summed, and the square
root of the sum is displayed.
ComparisonReference ( Energy) this number (RMS) is calculated
from slot pass family peaks where the comparison peaks are smaller in
amplitude than the corresponding Reference peak. The difference in
amplitude of each such peak is squared, then summed, and the square
root of the sum is displayed.
Normalized Comp Ref these two fields (RMS) are calculated by
taking the ratio of numbers displayed in the ComparisonReference (+
Energy or Energy) columns to the number in the Ref. Slot Pass
Energy Sum field at the bottom of this display.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

Ref. Slot Pass Energy Sum this number (RMS) is calculated by


adding the squared amplitude of each identified slot pass family peak
in the Reference spectrum, and taking the square root of the summed
value.
Any comparison peak in the Slot Pass family of peaks increasing significantly above the reference will be marked with either -> or *>
(*> indicates a larger change than ->). An explanation of these
flags will appear at the bottom of the analysis page (provided at least
one peak is tagged). The message appearing on the analysis screen are
as follows:
Research has correlated faults with significant change in components of
the Slot Pass Family of Frequencies.
Be aware of significant changes in any peak marked ->.
The amplitude of any peak marked *> has significantly changed.

&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR5%0YLHZ
When performing analysis on High frequency Flux measurements, the analysis
type called Flux Stator is sent as a case history to RBMview if the fault level is
exceeded. The more peaks penetrating the fault level, the higher the severity.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



4XLFN(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
This evaluation method allows the analyst to retrieve a limited summary for the
high frequency flux comparison analysis. The analyst may have taken data all day,
and with this evaluation tool, he/she is able to get a brief analysis showing which
motors experienced changes. When Plots to Display is set to None, a screen similar to Fig. 5-24 will be shown.

)LJ([DPSOHRITXLFNHYDOXDWLRQRXWSXWRIKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[FRLOVSHFWUDOGDWD
DQDO\VLV ZKHQ0RWRU9LHZLVUHTXHVWHGWRGRVXFKDQDQDO\VLV 

Equipment Point gives the name of the equipment and measurement point ID
for each specific spectrum analyzed.
Spectrum Date Time displays the date and time of collection for the particular
spectrum being analyzed.
Speed RPS/RPM the speed calculated by MotorView or manually located by
the user. Data is shown in RPS or RPM according to the setup in the Globals menu.
Slot Pass Family Parameters the four columns display data indicative of more
average properties of the slot pass family of peaks (in RMS units).



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

2xLF Family (+ Energy) this number (RMS) is calculated from the


2xLF family of slot pass frequencies where the comparison peaks are
larger in amplitude than the corresponding Reference peak. The difference in amplitude of each such peak is squared, then summed, and the
square root of the sum is determined. The displayed value is the above
calculated RMS number normalized by the Reference Slot Pass Energy
Sum (see page 5-61).
2xLF Family ( Energy) this number (RMS) is calculated from the
2xLF family of slot pass frequencies where the comparison peaks are
smaller in amplitude than the corresponding Reference peak. The difference in amplitude of each such peak is squared, then summed, and
the square root of the sum is determined. The displayed value is the
above calculated RMS number normalized by the Reference Slot Pass
Energy Sum (see page 5-61).
SPD Sideband Family (+ Energy) this number (RMS) is calculated
from the Running Speed Sideband family of slot pass frequencies
where the comparison peaks are larger in amplitude than the corresponding Reference peak. The difference in amplitude of each such
peak is squared, then summed, and the square root of the sum is determined. The displayed value is the above calculated RMS number normalized by the Reference Slot Pass Energy Sum (see page 5-61).
SPD Sideband Family ( Energy) this number (RMS) is calculated
from the Running Speed Sideband family of slot pass frequencies
where the comparison peaks are smaller in amplitude than the corresponding Reference peak. The difference in amplitude of each such
peak is squared, then summed, and the square root of the sum is determined. The displayed value is the above calculated number normalized
by the Reference Slot Pass Energy Sum (see page 5-61).
This analysis option will also give indication of possible faults or problems. Listed
below is the available recommendation. The indicating symbol will appear in the
left portion of the Speed RPS (or RPM) column for each data point with potential fault information.
# Possible indication of stator related problems. Review the tagged
spectra individually for more detailed analysis.

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR5%0YLHZ
When performing analysis on High frequency Flux measurements, the analysis
type called Flux Stator is sent as a case history to RBMview if the fault level is
exceeded. The more peaks penetrating the fault level, the higher the severity.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

+LJK)UHTXHQF\7UHQG(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
Analysis of the slot pass family of peaks for a particular motor can be visually displayed as a trend plot by selecting Trend for the Plots to Display field. By
selecting the Trend option, six plots can be displayed. The first trend (shown in
Fig. 5-25) plots the time of the collected data versus a calculated parameter of the
2xLF family of slot pass frequencies for which the amplitude of the sidebands in the
comparison spectrum is greater than the associated peaks in the reference spectrum (for description, see normalized Comparison Reference (+ Energy) see
page 5-60). If the Abbreviated High Flux Trend Summary field is enabled, this
plot will not be displayed.

)LJ 7UHQGSORWRI506QRUPDOL]HGVSHFWUDOHQHUJ\LQWKHVHWRI[/)VLGHEDQGVDERXW
WKHSULQFLSDOVORWSDVVIUHTXHQF\ZKHUHWKHVLGHEDQGDPSOLWXGHLQWKHFRPSDULVRQVSHFWUXP
LVODUJHUWKDQLQWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



1RWH

Laboratory tests have shown that this and the other calculated slot
pass frequency parameters show substantial changes when stator
faults have been put into a number of motors. With the limited data
available at this time, these parameters are trended as a possible indicator of stator degradation. Significant changes in these parameters
should prompt the use of additional diagnostics to study the motor
for possible developing electrical problems.
The second plot generated with the Trend option is shown in Fig. 5-26. This
trend plots the time of the collected data versus a calculated parameter of the 2xLF
family of slot pass frequencies for which the amplitude of the sidebands in the comparison spectrum is less than the associated peaks in the reference spectrum. (For
details on normalized Comparison Reference ( Energy) see page 5-60). If the
Abbreviated High Flux Trend Summary field is enabled, this plot will not be displayed.

)LJ 7UHQGSORWRIWKH506QRUPDOL]HGVSHFWUDOHQHUJ\LQWKHVHWRI[/)VLGHEDQGV
DERXWWKHSULQFLSDOVORWSDVVIUHTXHQF\ZKHUHWKHVLGHEDQGDPSOLWXGHLQWKHFRPSDULVRQ
VSHFWUXPLVOHVVWKDQLQWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

The third trend plot is shown in Fig 5-27. It plots the time of the collected data
versus the maximum of the absolute value of the two previously plotted parameters
of the 2xLF family of slot pass frequencies, where if the greater measure is picked,
it is plotted positive, and if the lesser measure is picked, it is plotted as an absolute
value. If the Abbreviated High Flux Trend Summary option is enabled, this plot
will be displayed.

)LJ 7UHQGSORWUHSUHVHQWLQJWKHPD[LPXPDEVROXWHFKDQJHIRUWKH[/)VLGHEDQG
SDUDPHWHUFDOFXODWHGE\0RWRU9LHZIRUKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[GDWD

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



The fourth trend (see Fig. 5-28) plots the time of the collected data versus a calculated parameter of the running speed sidebands about all of the 2xLF family of slot
pass frequencies for which the amplitude of the sidebands in the comparison spectrum is greater than the associated peaks in the reference spectrum (for description, see normalized Comparison Reference (+ Energy) see page 5-60). If the
Abbreviated High Flux Trend Summary field is enabled, this plot will not be displayed.

)LJ WUHQGSORWRIWKH506QRUPDOL]HGVSHFWUDOHQHUJ\LQWKHVHWRIUXQQLQJVSHHG
VLGHEDQGVDERXWDOO[/)VLGHEDQGVRISULQFLSDOVORWSDVVIUHTXHQF\ZKHUHWKHVLGHEDQG
DPSOLWXGHLQWKHFRPSDULVRQVSHFWUXPLVODUJHUWKDQLQWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

The fifth plot generated with the Trend option is shown in Fig. 5-29. This trend
plots the time of the collected data versus a calculated parameter of the running
speed sidebands about all of the 2xLF family of slot pass frequencies for which the
amplitude of the sidebands in the comparison spectrum is less than the associated
peaks in the reference spectrum (for description, see normalized Comparison
Reference (+ Energy) see page 5-60). If the Abbreviated High Flux Trend Summary field is enabled, this plot will not be displayed.

)LJ 7UHQGSORWRIWKH506QRUPDOL]HGVSHFWUDOHQHUJ\LQWKHVHWRIUXQQLQJVSHHG
VLGHEDQGVDERXWDOO[/)VLGHEDQGVRISULQFLSDOVORWSDVVIUHTXHQF\ZKHUHWKHVLGHEDQG
DPSOLWXGHLQWKHFRPSDULVRQVSHFWUXPLVOHVVWKDQLQWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



The sixth (and final) trend plot is shown in Fig. 5-30. It plots the time of the collected data versus the maximum of the absolute value of the two previously plotted
measures of the running speed sidebands about all of the 2xLF family of slot pass
frequencies, where if the greater measure is picked, it is plotted positive, and if the
lesser measure is picked, it is plotted as an absolute value. If the Abbreviated High
Flux Trend Summary option is enabled, this plot will be displayed.

)LJ 7UHQGSORWUHSUHVHQWLQJWKHPD[LPXPDEVROXWHFKDQJHIRUWKHUXQQLQJVSHHG
VLGHEDQGSDUDPHWHUFDOFXODWHGE\0RWRU9LHZIRUKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[GDWD

1RWH

A minimum of two measurements must be taken (within the time


interval of the displayed data) on a measurement point to enable
MotorView to create a trend plot.

&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR5%0YLHZ
When performing analysis on High frequency Flux measurements, the analysis
type called Flux Stator is sent as a case history to RBMview if the fault level is
exceeded. The more peaks penetrating the fault level, the higher the severity.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

3DUDPHWHU3URILOH(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
A bar chart graph showing the rotor bar, electrical and stator conditions for any particular motor, for any flux data, can be viewed by selecting Profile in the Plots to
Display field. The purpose for displaying this graph is to allow the user to quickly
look at a point and know if the motor is in a good or alarm condition. The motor
condition is plotted based on a percent of alarm condition.
Analysis can be performed on low frequency flux data, slot pass frequency flux data
or both low and slot pass frequency flux data. The data to evaluate depends on a
combination of selections including Scope of Analysis and Limit Point IDs Analyzed found on the Motor Analysis Options menu and the Flux Evaluation
option found on the Flux Coil Analysis Options menu. If both the low and slot pass
frequency data is to be evaluated simultaneously and Specify Data to Profile on
the Profile Display Options menu is Selected, then the data to be chosen will be
based on the low frequency data.
An example of a plot evaluating slot pass frequency flux measurements is shown in
the figure below:

)LJ 3DUDPHWHUSURILOHSORWIRUDQDO\VLVRIKLJKIUHTXHQF\IOX[GDWD

3HUIRUPLQJ)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV



1RWH

If the motor condition is in alarm, it is highly recommended that the


appropriate data be reviewed in detail (through spectral analysis) to
verify the results.



)OX[&RLO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

&KDSWHU 

34

7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

2YHUYLHZ
Proactive motor monitoring methods can be used to avoid premature failures as
well as provide additional sensitivity to electrically-generated faults. MotorView II
incorporates the measurements of temperature and magnetic flux to accomplish
this. Abnormal temperatures can point to several potential problems such as:
Overheating due to poor air flow or unbalanced voltage
Bearing failure and
Degradation in the rotor or stator.
A flux coil is employed to capture flux signals which provide an electrical quality
signature sensitive to conditions which alter the electrical characteristics of the
motor such as:
Broken rotor bars
Eccentricity
Imbalance between phases and
Stator faults.
The proactive and predictive power of flux and temperature measurements is
presented in this manual. Detailed descriptions, implementation and advantages
of magnetic flux analysis are covered extensively in Chapter 5. The beginning of
this chapter provides an in-depth discussion and description of temperature monitoring. Additional sections present detailed information pertaining to the efficient
operation of the Thermal/Electrical portion of MotorView.



7HPSHUDWXUH0HDVXUHPHQWV
Excessive and prolonged heat is the main factor responsible for shortening the life
expectancy of motors. The two components most affected by excessive heat are the
insulation system and bearings. A general rule of thumb is that the thermal life of
an insulation system is halved for each 10C increase in exposure temperature
above the nameplate temperature [2,3]. Higher temperatures also reduce the viscosity of oil or grease in bearings. Thus, bearings fail prematurely due to improper
lubrication. Therefore, it is highly desirable to detect excessive heat within motors
and prevent extended periods of operation under such conditions. Temperature
measurements are a simple, fast method for estimating motor overheating.
Common causes of overheating are overloading, bearing seizure and misalignment (see the References section). However, the following conditions can also contribute to overheating:
Restricted ventilation
Single phasing
High ambient temperatures
Excessive duty cycles and
Power supply variations (high, low or unbalanced voltage); (see the References section).
0HDVXUHPHQW/RFDWLRQVDQG0HWKRGV

Temperature measurements are quick and easy to acquire. CSI recommends


taking temperature measurements at locations indicated on Fig. 6-1. These
include:
Three skin locations (over the stator)
At the motor foot and/or ambient air
On each bearing
On the motor termination box and
At the coupling.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

All measurement points must be marked so that subsequent measurements are


always made at the same place on the motor. Following these procedures will
ensure that temperature changes actually indicate variations in operating conditions, and are not the result of different sensor locations.

)LJ 7KLVILJXUHVKRZV LQDJHQHUDOZD\ WKHFRUUHFWSRVLWLRQRQDPRWRUWRPRQLWRUWKH


GLIIHUHQWWHPSHUDWXUHPHDVXUHPHQWSRLQWV

To mark motors for trendable temperature measurements, spray painting a flat


black spot at each measurement point location is recommended. Taking measurements on a black painted surface doubly ensures accurate and repeatable readings
when those readings are collected with non-contact IR temperature probes.



Temperature measurements can be acquired from both open drip proof (ODP)
and totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors. In practice, the type of motor
enclosure must be known in order to determine what kinds of temperatures to
expect. However, there are certain motor sub-classes where skin temperature measurements are not obviously useful for trending thermal performance, although
actual stator temperature measurements can be used. Examples of such motors are
Type I and II weather protected open type motors as well as pipe-ventilated, watercooled, water-air-cooled and air-to-air-cooled totally enclosed equipment.
Even though monitoring temperature is simple, certain factors can influence the
reading resulting in incorrect interpretation. Factors to be considered are effects
of:
Load
Ambient temperature
Heat generated by the sun, and
Location of measurements.
Motor temperature rise is a function of bearing friction, windage, core loss, copper
losses (referred to as I2R losses) and stray losses. Only stray and I2R losses vary with
motor load [2]. Since I2R is basically dissipated power, the temperature rise will
change roughly proportional to the power dissipation. Therefore, when trending
skin and bearing temperature data, the load of the motor must be considered
before inferring potential problems.
Ambient temperature influences the inlet air temperature and skin temperature.
Thus, temperature measurements can increase, solely as a response to increased
ambient air temperature. The analyst must be aware of this factor before concluding that a rise in temperature is caused by or indicative of a problem.
Another influence on surface temperature is the effect of solar heating upon
motors exposed to the sun's rays. The color, thickness and metal properties will also
have an effect on the surface temperature measurement. To avoid or reduce the
effect of radiant heating by the sun for outside motors, skin temperature measurements should be acquired below the horizontal center line and on the shaded side.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

A final factor influencing skin temperature measurements is the location. In general, the warmest spots on a motor will be where the mass is greatest and airflow is
smallest. Therefore, the warmest section on motors with open enclosures is generally in the middle; while the warmest section on totally enclosed motors is somewhere between the middle and the end furthest from the fan (TEFC type motors).
Temperatures will also vary about the circumference of the motor because of air
flow patterns within the motor. In addition, the distances between the stator and
shell of a motor are not the same around the total circumference. The closer the
motor case is to the stator, the more reliable and repeatable the data. Because skin
temperature will be different at various locations on the motor, it is essential that
measurement points be marked so trend data can be collected repeatedly at the
same location on the motor surface. For skin temperature measurements, the
points should be placed where the distance between the stator and motor case is
smallest.
Since the motor temperature is a function of the stator temperature, ambient air
temperature, and load, a thermal parameter is needed in order to correct for
ambient air and load effects. By calculating relative temperature (obtained by subtracting the ambient air temperature from the measured temperature), ambient
air temperature can be factored out. To account for changes in load, remember
that temperature rise is proportional to the power dissipated. Therefore, to normalize the relative temperature for a load range, the new thermal parameter is
defined as:

where:
Tn = normalized thermal parameter (normalized temperature rise)
Tpt = measured motor temperature at point
Tamb = measured ambient air temperature
Percent Load = percent full load of motor at measurement time
Monitoring for a significant increase in the trend value of each normalized thermal
parameter point will indicate faults and potential problems.



The temperature at the motor foot or base can be measured the same way skin temperatures are measured and should not be influenced by the temperature of the
motor body. Ensure that no air is blown over the foot which will change the
ambient air temperature reading. If this happens, find a piece of metal (near the
motor) that has the temperature of ambient air and take the foot measurement
there. In general, since the temperature of a motor foot will track the ambient air
temperature and will often be the same as ambient air temperature, this is the only
ambient air temperature needed. However, for motors having inlets at the inboard
and outboard ends, ambient temperatures need to be taken at each end of the
motor if the air temperature is typically different by more than a few degrees.
When collecting temperature data on the bearing housing, the same procedural
care discussed for skin temperature measurements applies. One measurement
point should be marked on each bearing so that trendable data can be acquired.
The motor termination box is located at the motor and houses the junction at
which conductors from power lines are connected to the supply lines of the motor.
The heat generated from this junction can change due to high resistance joints,
corrosion, improper make-up of metals, water or other intrusive substances.
Regardless of the cause, the skin temperature of the termination box will track
the changes in temperature due to conductor junction faults. The termination box
can be marked at the center of the box face provided it is not in direct sunlight.
The coupling temperature will rise with increased misalignment. Therefore,
trending the coupling temperature can lead to indications of misalignment. To
measure the temperature of the coupling, scan the length of the coupling along
the horizontal center line. Record the hottest temperature. In general, the coupling will be at ambient temperature when the motor and drive unit are properly
aligned.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

/RJJLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH0HDVXUHPHQWV

There are several methods for acquiring temperature data. One method is to
create measurement points to allow temperatures to be entered through the analyzer keypad. Keypad entry is typically used when the measurement device is not
capable of communicating with the analyzer via a voltage input. The other method
of acquiring data requires the Units Type Code of a measurement point to be
Temperature. (See the AMS Machinery Manager Technical Reference for information
about setting the Units Type Code with the Database Setup program.) Then, with
the correct sensitivity for the temperature probe (in volts/engineering unit, volts/
F, or volts/C), the temperature probe can be used in conjunction with the data
collector to log temperature readings. Appendix A describes in more detail the
setup and use of data collectors to collect temperature data when using CSI 515,
510, or 505 IR temperature probes.

7HPSHUDWXUH0RQLWRULQJ([DPSOHV
Two examples illustrating the power of temperature monitoring follow. The first
case history shows excessive temperature growth due to clogged air inlets while the
second one demonstrates how temperature indicates bearing degradation.
,QFUHDVLQJ0RWRU/LIH

The first step to assure normal motor life is to keep the motor clean. As a motor gets
dirty, air flow diminishes, heat transfer to cooling air diminishes, and temperatures
rise. Therefore, monitoring motor temperatures is recommended as a proactive
measurement to guarantee that a motor remains clean and air flows as required.



High temperatures were observed on the skin and inboard bearing of a 40 HP,
TEFC, paper pump motor (see Fig. 6-2). Over a period of a few weeks, air flow
noticeably decreased as the temperature continued to rise. After the fan cover was
cleaned (allowing air to flow into the fan and over the motor), the temperatures
decreased about 150 Fn (Fn = normalized temperature). If the motor had not
been cleaned, the life of the windings would have been shortened considerably due
to excessive heat.

)LJ 1RUPDOL]HGVNLQDQGEHDULQJWHPSHUDWXUHVVKRZLQJLQFUHDVHGKHDWGXHWRDFORJJHG
IDQFRYHURQD7()&PRWRU

&DWDVWURSKLF)DLOXUH,QGLFDWHGE\7HPSHUDWXUH

The increased bearing temperature of a 150 HP, TEFC, paper plant motor indicated a potential bearing failure. Unfortunately, the facility ignored the warning
signs and the inboard bearing fault resulted in a catastrophic failure. A crack was
created in the outer race which allowed the grease to exit. The bearing then
locked causing the rotor to spin in the bearing before it broke loose and wiped
the stator, a condition which could not be feasibly repaired. Temperatures of the
motor case closest to the inboard bearing and the ambient air are shown in Fig. 63. The normalized bearing temperature is displayed in Fig. 6-4. The motor failed
August 2, 1994. Data displayed after this date is acquired from the replacement
motor which has the same design characteristics as the discarded motor.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

1RWH

The normalized temperature increased ~30 Fn before the motor


failed and was replaced. For comparison (to Figs. 6-3 and 6-4), spectra
of a sister unit in good condition are shown in Figs. 6-5 and 6-6.

)LJ ,QERDUGEHDULQJDQGDPELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUHVIRUD7()&YDFXXPSXPSPRWRUZLWK
DIDXOW\LQERDUGEHDULQJ



)LJ 1RUPDOL]HGLQERDUGEHDULQJWHPSHUDWXUHWUHQGIRUD7()&YDFXXPSXPSPRWRUZLWK
DIDXOWHGLQERDUGEHDULQJ



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

)LJ ,QERDUGEHDULQJDQGDPELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUHVIRUD7()&YDFXXPSXPSPRWRULQ
JRRGFRQGLWLRQ

)LJ 1RUPDOL]HGLQERDUGEHDULQJWHPSHUDWXUHWUHQGIRUD7()&YDFXXPSXPSPRWRULQ
JRRGFRQGLWLRQ



6HOHFWLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO2SWLRQV
From the AMS Machinery Manager main menu (under the header Diagnostics
and Reporting), start the MotorView program by selecting MotorView Analysis.
The Motor Analysis Options menu will then be displayed. Use this menu to determine which data will be selected for plotting and analysis, and to specify automatic
printing.

To analyze thermal/electrical data, select (toggle) the Analysis option to


Thermal/Electrical. Other options are described in the section starting with
Selecting Motor Analysis Options on page 5-18.
Analysis of thermal/electrical data can be performed in various ways. Results can
be displayed in either of two ways:
All of the results
Results that exceed alarms
You can choose either to display or not display the trend plots. You also have the
choice of viewing single or multiple plots. The following sections describe how to
set up the six Thermal/Electrical Options screens.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO2SWLRQV
$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV

Source to Derive Load: - select from Flux Coil, Speed Value, or Load Value. If Flux
Coil is chosen, the program will calculate the speed (and therefore load) from the
low frequency flux coil spectrum. Otherwise, speed or load may be obtained
from the values previously given. If Speed Value is selected, the load will be calculated.
Speed/Load Point ID: - enter the measurement point ID of the low frequency
flux measurement point that is to be used to determine the speed or load of the
motor.
Normalize Temperatures: By pressing the space bar, five options will be displayed.
The option selected determines how the temperature will be calculated. The
options are:
Default: This choice, which is recommended by CSI, will apply the
Ambient and Load normalization to the motor skin temperature readings, and will apply the Ambient normalization to the other temperature points.

6HOHFWLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO2SWLRQV



Ambient & Load the normalized temperature parameter is calculated


by the formula shown at the end of this discussion, and applied to all
temperature points.
By Ambient Only eliminates the percent load variable in the normalized temperature equation (percent load will be set to 100% for all normalized temperature calculations), and applies this normalization to all
temperature points.
By Load Only eliminates the ambient temperature variable in the normalized temperature equation (i. e., ambient temperature will be set to
0 for all normalized temperature calculations), and applies this normalization to all temperature points.
By Nothing allows you to see temperature trends of raw temperature
measurements (no normalization).
The normalized thermal parameter is based on the actual measured temperature
of the point on the motor, the ambient temperature, and the load of the motor.

Average Ambient Temperatures: - this option enables you to average ambient temperatures if more than one ambient temperature point was measured for a particular motor. The program will average all temperature points labeled TA? for which
data was collected if a Yes response is selected. The measurement point entered
as Ambient Temp Point ID: will be used as the ambient temperature if answered
No.
Ambient Temp Point ID: - enter the measurement point which provides the
ambient temperature to be used to calculate the normalized thermal parameter.
The ambient temperature will be set to the measured temperature value of this
point if Average Ambient Temperatures has been answered No.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

High Frequency Search Method: - allows you to select either of two methods for
analyzing slot pass frequency flux data. If the number of rotor bars and stator slots
is known, select Nameplate. This choice tells MotorView to use the nameplate
data and the running speed to calculate initial values for the slot pass frequencies.
MotorView then uses these initial values as a starting point in looking for the slot
pass family of peaks. If the number of rotor bars and stator slots is not known, select
Algorithm (this instructs MotorView to use its algorithm to determine the slot
pass frequencies).
Derive Speed From Low Frequency: - To locate the slot pass family of peaks,
MotorView must know the running speed and/or principal slot pass frequency. If
MotorView has a difficult time determining the slot pass family or speed, marking
this option can help in determining the correct frequencies. When enabled, each
high frequency spectra will view the associated low frequency spectra to derive its
speed. If the associated low frequency spectra was not acquired within thirty minutes of the high frequency spectrum, the analysis of the particular data is performed as if this option was not enabled. For more information about how the slot
pass frequencies are located, see High Frequency Flux Analysis on page 5-14.
1RWH

This option is only valid if the low frequency data has been evaluated
prior to the high frequency flux data. In addition, the speeds of the
low frequency data must have been saved with each data point by
enabling the Save any Modified RPM option in the globals menu
(see Defining MotorView Global Parameters on page 3-2 for more
information).

1RWH

If MotorView continues to have problems determining speed and


slot pass frequencies (even after trying different combinations of the
above two options), try selecting a different Slot Pass Flux Factor
(selected from the Globals menu. For an explanation of this factor,
see the section that begins with Defining MotorView Global Parameters on page 3-2.

6HOHFWLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO2SWLRQV



Current Reference Point ID: - Enter the three letter identifier of the electric current measurement point. This measurement point is the one used as the baseline
for the flux measurement point(s) being evaluated.
0HDVXUHPHQW2SWLRQV

Report Exceptional Data Only: - displays only those parameters which exceed predefined alarm limits. See the remaining setup screens to set up alarm limits. Refer
to MotorView Alarm Thresholds - an Overview on page 6-24 for additional information about setting alarm thresholds.
Variables to Analyze: - calculates and displays a thermal parameter for Skin,
Bearing, Coupling and Terminal Temperatures. Qualitative Factors will display
trend data relative to your observation of the motors condition. Flux Coil Data calculates and displays as trend data, motor parameters pertaining to rotor bar condition, low frequency flux, and stator condition (as defined by two high frequency
flux parameters).



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

'LVSOD\2SWLRQV

0XOWLSOH7UHQG3ORWV

Plots to Display: on the Thermal/Electrical Options menu must be answered


Multiple Trend in order to use these options.
Maximum Variables on Plots: Enter the number of variables from 1 to 8, which
are to be plotted on each page.
Display Data as Strip Plot: - enables the strip plot format. A No answer enables
the overlaid plot format.
Plot Sequence for Data: - determines the order of the selected trend data on the
plot:
Top Down - places trend data on the plot from the top down in order of
the earliest selected trend to the latest selected trend.
Bottom Up - places trend data on the plot from the bottom up in order
of the earliest selected trend to the latest selected trend.
Plot as Percent of Alarm: - specify whether trend data are to be plotted in Engineering units (No), or as a percentage of a Fault, Alert or Warning alarm level.
Display Fault/Alert/ Warning Level: - displays these levels on the trend plot.
Grid Lines on Plot? - places a grid overlay on the displayed plot.

6HOHFWLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO2SWLRQV



$[LV2SWLRQV

7HPSHUDWXUH$[LV2SWLRQV

Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled? - when selected, enables a fixed range for the
amplitude scale. When not selected, automatic amplitude scaling is enabled.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

7KHUPDO5RWRU$ODUPV

Overwrite Temperature Alarms: for temperature points created using the Setup
DBASE function in MotorView, alarm limits are defined for the temperature
points. Manually created temperature points can also have alarm limits. When not
selected, analysis is based on the alarms that are assigned to the temperature points.
When this option is selected, you can use the following four fields to define alarm
limits relative to the baseline value for each temperature point. In general, the baseline value is set equal to the value of the parameter (in this case, the temperature)
acquired for the first route data collected on the measurement point.
1RWH

Baseline values can be adjusted in the Modify Data Statistics section of


the Stored Data Management, or DATMGR program.
Absolute this value serves as the absolute alarm in the sense that if the
temperature reading exceeds this level, it will trip the Fault alarm
(independent of the definitions for Warning, Alert, or Fault).
Max Delta Warning the Warning alarm is defined as the baseline
value plus the value entered for Max Delta Warning level.

6HOHFWLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO2SWLRQV



Max Delta Alert the Alert alarm is defined as the alarm level equal to
the baseline plus the Max Delta Alert level.
Max Delta Fault the Fault alarm is defined as an alarm level equal to
the baseline plus the Max Delta Fault level.
1RWH

In general, Max Delta Warning should be less than Max Delta Alarm
which should be less than Max Delta Fault (Max Delta Warning <
Max Delta Alarm <Max Delta Fault).

1RWH

The temperature values entered are applied to each temperature


point, assuming the units of that point (whether fahrenheit, Celsius,
or normalized parameters).
Rotor Bar Alarms the three alarms defined under this heading are used as
alarms for the Rotor Bar parameter related to the low frequency flux coil analysis
of high resolution flux points (point F?1, or the point with Units Type Code
selected as Flux/Low Freq.
The rotor bar parameter is calculated as the decibel difference between the line frequency amplitude and the NPxSF sideband associated with rotor bar condition. If
an engineering unit is selected in Globals as the Unit Mode for flux measurements, this parameter is the ratio of the line frequency amplitude to the NPxSF
sideband associated with rotor bar condition.
If a reference electric current measurement has been collected and calibrated for
a corresponding flux measurement (see Magnetic Flux Analysis on page 5-5) the
alarm levels are compared against the flux coil data, normalized to the corresponding electric current measurement. If an electric current measurement has
not been collected and calibrated, the alarms are applied to the raw flux coil data
itself.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

)OX[(QYHORSHV

The remaining two parameters use five values, defined similarly, to calculate
Warning, Alert, and Fault alarms for each parameter.
Flux Speed Sideband Alarms This alarm is a dual upper alarm. Flux speed
sideband is a parameter which gives a measure of the spectral energy in the running speed sidebands about line frequency. The parameter is derived by:
1. . . Squaring the amplitudes for each running speed sideband about line
frequency,
2. . . Summing these squared values,
3. . . Calculating the square root of the summed value.

6HOHFWLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO2SWLRQV



Flux Slot Pass Alarms This alarm is a dual upper alarm. The Flux Slot Pass
parameter refers to parameters which measure the spectral energy in part of either
of two sideband families of peaks about principal slot pass frequency. One family is
the 2xLF sidebands. The other is the family of RPS (or running speed sidebands)
about any of the other 2xLF sidebands. The actual parameter value is the larger of
the two numbers calculated by the square root of the sum of the squares of the
amplitudes of any sideband peaks in the comparison spectrum which are either
larger or smaller than the corresponding peaks in the reference spectrum. This
number is normalized by dividing by the Reference Slot Pass Energy (see on page
5-61 for additional information).
Threshold values entered for the following fields will be applied to the flux speed
sidebands or either of the flux slot pass parameters. MotorView provides default
values for all of these parameters. CSI recommends the analyst fully understands
how the parameters are defined so that you make appropriate changes to the levels.
Absolute The number entered here is the Engineering Unit value which you
wish to assign as the upper Fault level for these parameters. If the alarm levels calculated from the Percent of Average and the Maximum Percent Delta values
are smaller, the larger of these two will be set to the Fault level. The fault value is set
to zero if the Absolute value is less than the Minimum Percent Absolute alarm level.
1RWH

Flux parameters that are amplitude ratios are dimensionless.


Percent of Average The number entered in this field (as a percent) is applied to
the average flux parameters. The average flux parameter is calculated (for these
flux parameters) similar to the way AMS Machinery Manager calculates average
values (for analysis parameters defined within DBASE). The average is done over
the number of points equal to the number of data values in statistical calculation,
set on the measurement point definition screen. The amplitude for upper
window alarms is calculated as:



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

This amplitude is compared with the amplitude value calculated by the Maximum Percent Delta field, and the smaller of these two levels is chosen as the
upper alert level with the requirement that the alert level must be greater than
or equal to the alarm level calculated from the Minimum Percent Absolute
value.
Maximum Percent Delta - The number in this field (expressed as a percent) multiplied by the average parameter value is added to the average parameter value to
obtain an Upper limit Alarm:


Minimum Percent Absolute The number in this field is the minimum percent
alarm threshold level for the different parameters. It is calculated as:



The alarm level values (when being calculated) are compared to this value, and if
they are smaller than this minimum threshold, are set equal to the minimum
threshold.
Standard Deviation The number in this field is used in conjunction with standard deviations calculated for the different parameters, to calculate a warning level.
This warning level is calculated as:
6WG'HYV[&DOFXODWHG6WDQGDUG'HYRI3DUDP $YHUDJH)OX[3DUDPHWHU9DOXH
The calculated Standard Dev is calculated from parameter values similar to the way
AMS Machinery Manager calculates statistical values. The number of measurements equal to the number of data values in statistical calculation are used to calculate the average parameter value. This same set of measurements is used to
calculate the Calculated Standard Deviation of the Parameter values with respect to
their Calculated Average Parameter value. This warning level is then compared
with the Alert level and, provided it is smaller, is set as the Warning level. If the Standard Deviation value is larger than the Alert value, the Warning alarm is set to zero
(or ignored).

6HOHFWLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO2SWLRQV



0RWRU9LHZ$ODUP7KUHVKROGVDQ2YHUYLHZ
Typically, in AMS Machinery Manager, alarm thresholds are defined for a particular measurement point in an Alarm Limit Set. These alarm limits are applied to
either an Analysis Parameter Set or directly to a measurement point (i.e., temperature point). However, since MotorView II calculates parameters not defined in
analysis parameter sets, thresholds must be defined differently as seen on the
Thermal/Electrical Options menu.
MotorView II uses the information entered on this menu to define alarm levels for
flux parameters which it treats as the equivalent of warning, alert, and fault alarms
in AMS Machinery Managers DBASE. When MotorView sets up temperature
points, it defines corresponding alarm limit sets (for temperature points).
In general, those setups will serve to define alarm levels for temperature points. If
you wish, you can override those assignments (within MotorView II) by selecting
the thresholds defined in this menu. However, if you have manually created flux
points with defined analysis parameter and/or alarm limits for flux parameters (in
AMS Machinery Manager), MotorView II will not analyze those parameters or use
those alarm limits.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

3HUIRUPLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV
To acquire thermal/electrical data, measurements must be taken using a temperature probe, flux coil, and electric current clamp (the electric current measurement
is only needed for baseline and verification measurements). Each of these sensors
is attached to a CSI machinery analyzer for measurement collection and the data
stored in the analyzer is transferred to a AMS Machinery Manager database for
storage and for analysis using MotorView II. For an explanation of collecting electric current measurements, see Chapter 4, for flux coil measurements, see Chapter
5 and for temperature measurements see Temperature Measurements on page
6-2.
After setting up the Motor Analysis Options menu and selecting your choices in
the Thermal/Electrical Options menus on page 6-13, the analysis can be performed. Upon acceptance of the setup menus, the first analysis screen Results of
Thermal/Electrical Analysis (shown as Fig. 6-7) will be displayed.

)LJ 7KLVLVWKHILUVWDQDO\VLVUHVXOWVVFUHHQIRU7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDODQDO\VLVGLVSOD\LQJ
SDUDPHWHUYDOXHVIRUWKHDQDO\]HGGDWDFRPSDUHGWRFDOFXODWHGDODUPOHYHOV

Measurement Point This is the three character ID for the measurement point
whose results are being presented.
Analysis Parameter Provides a brief description of the parameter being analyzed.

3HUIRUPLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV



Parameter Value The latest value of various parameters collected for this particular measurement, as adjusted by MotorView II. For example, temperature readings are displayed based upon which of the five options you chose for the
Normalize Temperatures field on the Thermal/Electrical Options menu (see
Normalized Temperatures under Analysis Options on page 6-13). For
example, if you selected Normalize/Ambient & Load, the temperature value will
be displayed normalized in that manner.
Alarm/Fault Levels Threshold values, calculated using the values entered on the
Thermal/Electrical Options menu are entered in these two columns. Warning or
alert values are entered in the Alarm column, and fault values in the Fault column.
The value displayed in the Alarm column will be the warning level (unless the alert
level is exceeded). If the alert level is exceeded, the value displayed will be the alert
level.
Alarm Code If an alarm level is exceeded by any parameter, a code letter is displayed in this column indicating the most severe alarm which was tripped. The
alarm codes are defined in Fig. 6-8.
Days to Alarm This field will have a numeric value if a straight line projection
(through the last three calculated parameter values projected forward in time)
would exceed the fault level in less than 999 days.



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

$ODUP&RGH

$ODUP/LPLW

7KHSURMHFWHGPHDVXUHGYDOXHZLOOH[FHHGWKHDEVROXWHIDXOW
OHYHOZLWKLQWKUHHPHDVXUHPHQWLQWHUYDOV

%U

(DUO\ZDUQLQJDODUPSURGXFHGE\WKH%DVHOLQH5DWLR

%V

(DUO\ZDUQLQJDODUPSURGXFHGE\WKH0D[LPXP'HYLDWLRQV

&

$OHUW/HYHODODUP

'

)DXOW/HYHODODUP

+L

$PHDVXUHGSDUDPHWHULVDERYHWKHZHDNVLGHYDOXHZLWKD
GXDOORZHUDODUPW\SH

/R

$PHDVXUHGSDUDPHWHULVEHORZWKHZHDNVLGHYDOXHZLWKD
GXDOXSSHUDODUPW\SH

9

$PHDVXUHGSDUDPHWHULVDERYHWKHPD[LPXPRUEHORZWKH
PLQLPXPVHQVRUYDOLGLW\DODUP

:

$PHDVXUHGSDUDPHWHULVZLWKLQWKHUDQJHHVWDEOLVKHGE\WKH
,Q:LQGRZDODUP
)LJ $ODUP&RGHV

&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR5%0YLHZ
The thermal parameters will generate a case history for any normalized temperature point exceeding the fault level. In addition, Flux Rotor Bar and Flux
Stator will generate case histories if a fault is exceeded based on the appropriate
measurement. The bases of case histories generated by either low frequency or
high frequency flux data is detailed in chapter 5.
1RWH

Flux data will only be sent to the RBMview program when in the
automatic problem mode.

3HUIRUPLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV



7UHQG'LVSOD\VRI7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO3DUDPHWHUV
If the selection for Plots to Display on the Thermal/Electrical Options/Display
Options menu is either Single Trend or Multiple Trend, a trend plot for each of
the parameters listed in the Results of Thermal/Electrical Analysis will be displayed. Trend plots will be displayed versus time as follows:
Speed
Load
Ambient Temperature (either a specified point or average, depending on
your definition on the Thermal/Electrical Options menu)
Temperature points (Normalized as defined on the Analysis Options page
of Thermal/Electrical Options menu and displayed according to the
Variable to Analyze... selections on the Measurements page)
Observation values Cleanliness OCN and Air Flow OAF, on a scale from
1 to 4 1 is ideal and 4 is bad)
Flux parameters (as calculated by MotorView II)



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

A trend plot of speed, load, and ambient temperature can be displayed when
selecting Multiple Trend, as seen in Fig. 6-9.

)LJ 7UHQGSORWRI7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDOSDUDPHWHUVGLVSOD\LQJWKHPRWRUVSHHGPRWRUORDG
DQGDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHYDOXHV

3HUIRUPLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV



Temperature parameters can be displayed on one plot as seen in Fig. 6-10.

)LJ 7UHQGSORWRI7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDOSDUDPHWHUVGLVSOD\LQJQRUPDOL]HGWHPSHUDWXUH
SDUDPHWHUV



7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

On a separate plot, observation parameters are displayed as in Fig. 6-11.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRI7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDOSDUDPHWHUVGLVSOD\LQJREVHUYDWLRQSDUDPHWHUVIRU
FOHDQOLQHVVDQGDLUIORZ

3HUIRUPLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV



The final set of trend plots displayed are those of the flux parameters (see Fig. 6-12).
The description of these calculated parameters follows the figure.

)LJ7UHQGSORWRI7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDOSDUDPHWHUVGLVSOD\LQJIRXUIOX[SDUDPHWHUV
FDOFXODWHGE\0RWRU9LHZ,,

Flux RBARS (Flux Rotor Bar) The flux rotor bar parameter is calculated as the
decibel difference between the line frequency amplitude and the NPxSF sideband
associated with rotor bar condition. If an engineering unit is selected in Globals as
the Unit Mode, this parameter is the ratio of the line frequency amplitude to the
NPxSF sideband amplitude associated with rotor bar condition.
Flux SPDSB Flux SPDSB, or flux speed sidebands, is a parameter which gives a
measure of the spectral energy in the running speed sidebands about line frequency. The parameter is derived by:



1.

Squaring the RMS amplitudes for each running speed sideband


about line frequency,

2.

Summing these squared values,

3.

Taking the square root of the summed value.

7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

HFFLUX 2LF This flux parameter, calculated by MotorView, is derived from the
flux slot pass parameter, and is a measure of the spectral energy in the 2xLF sidebands about the principal slot pass frequency.
HFFLUX SPD This flux parameter, calculated by MotorView, is derived from the
flux slot pass parameter, and is a measure of the spectral energy in the RPS or running speed sidebands about any of the 2xLF sidebands of the principal slot pass frequency.

3HUIRUPLQJ7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV





7KHUPDO(OHFWULFDO$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

&KDSWHU 

6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

2YHUYLHZ
Shaft voltages and currents have been documented and discussed in the open literature since at least 1924 [6]. Since that time, many papers have been published
regarding various aspects of why the voltage is present, the damage resulting from
current passage through bearings, couplings, or gears, and possible remedies.
However, even today, it is common for industry to fail to correctly diagnose this as
the root cause of many chronic problems [7,8].
All electric motors have some level of shaft voltage. Damage due to shaft voltage is
less common on single speed AC electric motors, but much more frequent in variable speed electric motors (AC and DC) [7, 9, 10]. The increasing use of this type
of motor, in both new and existing applications, means an ever widening circle of
maintenance departments, and their consultants, are encountering damage which
results from shaft voltages. Furthermore, modern advances in motor controls and
retrofits of existing AC motors for use with variable speed drives makes the need for
correct diagnosis and remedy even greater. Shaft current and voltage measurements can be made using the CSI Model 348SP Shaft Probe with the CSI Models
2115/2117 or 2120 Analyzers. The Shaft Probe is designed to measure:
AC RMS voltage
DC voltage
Peak voltage
AC RMS current
DC current
All of these measurements can be evaluated as parameters and/or spectra when
selecting the Shaft Volt/Current option in MotorView II.



7\SHVRI%HDULQJ'DPDJH
Damage to bearings due to electrical causes may be overlooked due to haste in getting a piece of equipment back into service, blame misplaced on a bad application, misinterpretation of bearing failure due to lubricant failure or faulty
bearings. Although motors and other equipment with chronic bearing problems
should be especially suspect, it is recommended that all bearings be inspected
when replaced.
There are several distinctive patterns of bearing damage from electrical sources
[11, 12, 13, 14]. Forms of these occur in both rolling element and sleeve type bearings.
One of the most common types of damage is frosting. Frosting may occur on any
bearing surface, metallic seals, and gears. Affected areas have a matte appearance
as would result from sand blasting. Damage may not be obvious to the naked eye,
especially if it covers the entire surface. Microscopic examination reveals individual
pits with round, shiny bottoms, where melting has occurred. In more advanced
stages, these pits may overlap losing some of their distinctive features [11,12]. This
appearance is a result of currents created during voltage discharge and is commonly referred to as electric discharge machining (EDM). This type of damage is
unlikely to show distinctly in vibration data.
Pitting is similar to frosting except the pits are significantly larger (1/32 to 1/4
inch).There are typically fewer pits than are present with frosting, but the characteristic smooth, shiny pit bottoms should be present. Pits are larger due to stronger
current discharges. Sometimes confused with fretting type corrosion [11], this type
of damage may be visible on gears as well as bearings.
Fluting occurs in rolling element type bearings. It is thought to be a result of more
advanced frosting or pitting damage that occurs when equipment is run at a consistent speed for long periods [10, 13]. Once established electrically, the damage
may be self perpetuating mechanically. The appearance in the bearing race is that
of a frosted area with repetitive barring at right angles to the direction of rolling element travel. This could be described as a washboard pattern. Typically, the fluting
pattern is most pronounced in the load zone of the outer race and uniform about
the inner race. It can also show on the rollers themselves [13]. This type of damage
can result in increased vibration levels.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

Welding can take various forms, from leaving major pits to actually bonding parts
to the point they must be separated with a sledge hammer. It occurs when significant current passes between parts. This can be the result of a poor choice for
ground placement clamps (when arc welding during maintenance), or even severe
faults such as a rotor contacting a stator [11].
Sleeve-type bearing surfaces can experience spark tracks which appear as scratches
in the babbitt. Unlike scratches arising from a foreign particle, these may run askew
to the direction of rotation, have sharper edges, and round, shiny bottoms [11].

&RPPRQ&DXVHV
While the following discussion distinguishes a number of specific sources for electrical potential on the shaft, keep in mind that multiple sources may contribute to
the problems in a single piece of equipment [6,11,12,15].
All electric motors have some amount of induced shaft voltage due to asymmetries
introduced during manufacturing. Variations in the air gaps, windings, and metal
(rotor and frame) result in a fluctuating magnetic field which is cut by conducting
material. This condition gives rise to a current loop consisting of the shaft, bearings,
and casing. For most motors, this is not a significant problem. Very large motors
and vertical motors seem to be the most common candidates. This is typically
addressed by insulating the nondrive end bearing, thereby breaking the current
loop.
Although the literature surveyed did not indicate residual magnetism to be a
serious problem, this can be a source of shaft currents. Even insulating both bearings may still allow a circulating current to exist in the bearings themselves.
Obviously, but often overlooked, applying a voltage directly to a shaft via a short, or
a welding connection can result in severe damage.



Electrostatic sources (belts, charged particulates, charged oil, sheet processes, etc.)
can impart a voltage to a shaft. Unless grounded, the voltage on the shaft increases
until it is able to discharge to ground. This typically occurs when the bearing lubricant film suffers an electrical breakdown, resulting in electrical discharges between
bearing components. Since the electrical characteristics of a bearing will vary with
speed, lubricant, and clearances, the voltage level required to punch through the
oil film will vary. If high voltages are observed on a given shaft, and these voltages
result in a breakdown through the bearing, the higher the voltage at which breakdown occurs, the more potential there is for damage to the bearing. Grounding a
shaft is the best way to prevent high levels of voltage from accumulating.
Motors controlled by adjustable speed drives (AC and DC) have a greater incidence of bearing damage due to EDM. This can be attributed to the fundamental
design and performance characteristics of variable speed controllers, as well as to
secondary complications such as controller faults or excessive motor lead lengths.
In addition, there are circumstances where the current is insufficient to cause EDM
but can cause chemical changes in the lubricant resulting in raceway corrosion.
Because the dielectric strength of lubricants is greater for pulsed voltages than for
sine wave based voltage, much higher voltages may build on the rotor before discharging [10]. This increases the risk of damage due to EDM.

6KDIW3UREH5HTXLUHPHQWV
Shaft current and voltage measurements can be made using the CSI Model 348SP
Shaft Probe with the following CSI Analyzers:
The Model 2115 or 2117 Analyzer with firmware v6.11 or later.
The Model 2120 Analyzer with firmware v7.06 or later.
1RWH

Shaft current and voltage measurements can also be made using the
Model 348SP Shaft Probe and the UltraSpec 8000/8117 Analyzer
with the UltraSpec Motor application (v1.10 or later) and the
UltraMgr Windows software with the optional UltraMgr Motor software module (v3.10 or later). See the UltraSpec Motor Analysis Application (Ver 1. 10) Manual for more information.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

6KDIW3UREH&RQQHFWLRQDQG0HDVXUHPHQW

&6,0RGHO636KDIW3UREHDQG&DEOHV

When acquiring data with a CSI Analyzer, make connections as follows:


1. Connect the Lemo connector of the coiled data cable and the banana plug
connector of the grounding cable to the matching connections at the end of
the shaft probe handle.
2. Connect the 25-pin D connector of the coiled cable to the 25-pin connector at the top of the CSI 2115/2117 or 2120 Analyzer.
3a. If calibrating the DC level of the shaft probe, place the ground clamp
onto the shaft probe brush.
3b. If making a shaft measurement, place the ground clamp on bare metal,
somewhere on the equipment casing. This is typically a grounding strap or
bolt head on the motor casing which has been cleaned to bare metal.



/HPRFRQQHFWRU OHIW DQGEDQDQDSOXJJURXQG ULJKW FRQQHFWLRQVKRZQ

%UXVKWLSRISUREHLVHDVLO\UHSODFHGDVZHDURUGDPDJHRFFXUV 31



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

6XJJHVWLRQVIRUPDNLQJVKDIWPHDVXUHPHQWV

1. . . Clean the shaft first with a wire brush or other suitable materials. While the
shaft brush will self clean many shafts, this will tend to wear the brush
prematurely as excessive pressure may be required.
2. . . Inspect shafts with a strobe light before contacting surface for cleaning or
measurements. Look for obstructions, keys, or keyways, which could
interfere with measurements or grab/impact tools. Although, with care,
measurements can be made across keyways, sharp edges will wear the shaft
probe brush faster than a smooth shaft.
3. . . Replace worn shaft probe brushes. Shaft probe brushes with flattened
bristles or excessive wear will be more likely to give erratic readings. Firmly
grip the lower half of the shaft rod (to prevent turning inside the handle)
while unscrewing the shaft brush. Replace with CSI part number 99460.
Applying the shaft probe to the shaft:
(a) Have all cables, including the grounding clamp, properly connected
before initiating the shaft measurement.
(b) Carefully, place brush against rotating shaft with steady, but not excessive pressure. Try to contact the shaft approximately midpoint along the
bristled portion of the brush. Contact the shaft surface in an area rotating
away from you. Do not allow the un-insulated parts of the shaft probe to
touch the bearing face, as this could shunt the voltage to ground before
entering the measurement circuitry.
(c) After the shaft probe is in place against the shaft, press the button on the
probe to begin data acquisition. Important, Keep your attention focused on
the shaft probe and your hand. Do not try to watch the analyzer display. The
red LED on the shaft probe will flash on/off every 0.5 seconds for 5 times
when the measurement is complete. Remove the shaft probe from the shaft
before turning your attention back to the analyzer.



:DUQLQJ

Since the user is placing the transducer in contact with a rotating


shaft, use of this attachment is inherently hazardous. Extreme care
should be exercised to keep all body parts, clothing, and cables away
from the shaft. Never wrap a cable about your body to keep it away
from the shaft during this measurement! It is highly recommended
to view the surface to be contacted with a strobe light prior to making
contact, to detect possible obstructions or hazards. USE THIS TOOL
AT YOUR OWN RISK!



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV
From the AMS Machinery Manager main menu (under the header Diagnostics
and Reporting), start the MotorView program by selecting MotorView Analysis.
The Motor Analysis Options menu will then be displayed. Use this menu to determine which data will be selected for plotting and analysis, and to specify automatic
printing.
1RWH

You can view the disclaimer screen by selecting the Help/Disclaimer


pulldown menu or pressing Ctrl-D.
0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV

Analysis Type: - Select Shaft Volt/Current to analyze shaft voltages and currents as
root causes for bearing and tachometer failures.
Scope of Analysis: - Select from the options available for this field:

6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV



Entire Database - All Areas and respective Equipment under the currently
selected database will be available for analysis and plotting.
Specific Area - All Equipment under the selected Area (selected from the
next menu) will be available for analysis and plotting.
Specific Route - All of the Equipment on a route (selected from the next
menus) will be available for analysis and plotting.
Specific Equipment - An individual piece of Equipment (selected from the
next menus) will be available for analysis and plotting.
Specific Spectrum - A specific spectrum will be available for analysis and
plotting (the specific measurement point is selected from the next menus).
When looking at trend displays, this option defaults to Specific Equipment selection.
Limit Point IDs Analyzed: - can be used to group and/or limit the points to be
analyzed based on the three-character measurement point IDs. By selecting
Include, only those points that match the specified IDs will be analyzed. By
selecting Exclude, only those points that do not match the specified IDs will be
analyzed. Select Off to disable this feature. When using this feature, a measurement point ID has to pass the criteria of either the 1st Point ID or the 2nd Point ID
before being included/excluded in the analysis. (If the 2nd Point ID field is blank,
then only the 1st Point ID field is used.)
Actual characters from the measurement point IDs can be used in these fields as
well as wildcard symbols. A question mark ? represents any single character, and
an asterisk * represents a string of characters.
For example:
)""

ZLOOSORWDOOSRLQWVZLWKDQ)LQWKHILUVWSRVLWLRQ

""

ZLOOSORWDOOSRLQWVZLWKDLQWKHODVWSRVLWLRQ

1RWH

Each measurement point will be matched and analyzed only onceeven if it does pass the specified criteria in another grouping.
Data of Interest: - select from the following:



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

Data from Last Survey Only - Data will be analyzed only if it was collected
during the last survey.
Latest Available Data - The most recently collected data will be analyzed.
All Available Data - All data that applies to the specified criteria of this
menu will be analyzed.
Data Between Specified Dates - Only data that falls between the Starting &
Ending Date parameters will be analyzed (further limits the data that will
be analyzed).
Automatic Output Enabled? - A Yes answer enables automatic output. Each plot
or analysis screen displayed on the computer monitor is copied to the line printer
or plotter without further attention. The plots that are printed are determined by
the settings defined under Scope of Analysis, Limit Point IDs Allowed, and
Data of Interest.
To disable the automatic output, leave the selection box blank, and each plot will
be displayed only on the computer screen. Clicking on the OK button, or pressing
the Enter key while displaying a plot will advance the display to the associated results
listing.
Hardcopies of any single plot or listing displayed in this mode may be generated
manually by clicking on the Printer icon on the Tool bar, or pressing the PrtSc key
on the keyboard to send a screen image to the clipboard.
When you have filled in the fields on the Motor Analysis Options menu, and are
ready to move on, clicking the OK button will advance you to a set of screens where
you select the particular Area, route, Equipment, or measurement point for analysis. Your selection for the Scope of Analysis field determines the exact data for
analysis. After choosing and accepting the appropriate devices from these screens,
you will advance to the Shaft Voltage/Current Options menu, which is discussed
in the following section.

0RWRU9LHZ*OREDO3DUDPHWHUV
Globals - Click Globals on the function bar to access the Definition of Global
Parameters menu (menu is also available from the Display Options screen). This
menu is used to alter program characteristics that affect some of the various displays. For more information, refer to Defining MotorView Global Parameters on
page 3-2.

6HOHFWLQJ0RWRU$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV



1RWH

You must use the Globals parameters to define line frequency for AC
induction and variable frequency motors.
On the Globals/Eng. Units tab, make the following selections:
Shaft Voltage/Shaft Current - Select dB or an engineering unit to be used for the
amplitude scale of the spectral plots.
Selecting an engineering unit will display the data in engineering units on a logarithmic scale. For Shaft Probe analysis, an engineering unit is used for all non-spectral displays.
dB Reference - This reference value (Iref) is used when the measurement
unit is selected to be dB.
Spectral amplitude values are converted to dB as follows:
dB = 20 x LOG (I/Iref)
where: I is the amplitude of the spectral value
Iref is the dB reference value.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV
MotorView analyzes the collected Shaft Probe spectral data and then produces the
results either:
Manually, enabling you to step through and display the data on the computer screen, or
Automatically, the program selects and prints (or plots) the data without
operator intervention (this option is performed when you select Yes for
Automatic Output Enabled).
Spectral and/or waveform plots can be omitted from the analysis sequence, if
desired. Also, the results can be displayed as a trend plot.

6KDIW9ROWDJH&XUUHQW2SWLRQV0HQXV
The Shaft Voltage/Current Options menu is provided to select various options that
will be used when analyzing, displaying, and plotting the selected data.
$QDO\VLV2SWLRQV

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



Plots to Display? - Select Spectrum to display (and print, if applicable) the spectral plot associated with each analysis results list. Select None to display only the
analysis results list. Select Trend to obtain trend analysis plots. See Performing
Shaft Voltage/Current Analysis on page 7-23 for additional information.
Display Associated Waveform: - Answer Yes to plot associated waveforms (if
available) immediately following each spectral analysis results listing.
Units For Frequency Axis: - Select Hz, CPM, or Orders (multiples of normalizing
frequency or running speed) for the frequency axis of the spectral plot.
Fixed Frequency Scale Enabled? - when not selected, the program automatically
scales the frequency range of the plot. When selected, you must define the lower
and upper frequency values (in the units specified in Units For Frequency Axis)
that will be used for the plot.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled? - when not selected, the program automatically
scales the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, you must define the lower
and upper amplitude values that will be used for the plot.
'LVSOD\2SWLRQV

Display Fault Level: - when selected, the Fault level defined for this point is displayed on a trend plot.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

Display Alert Level: - when selected, the Alert level defined for this point is displayed on a trend plot.
Display Warning Level: - when selected, the Warning level defined for this point
is displayed on a trend plot.
Grid Lines On Plot? - places a grid overlay on the displayed spectral plot.
List Peaks Below Spectrum? - includes a list, following each plot, of the highest
peaks within the spectrum (up to the Number of Peaks to Locate).
Number of Peaks to Locate: - specifies the maximum number of peak
values that will be listed after the spectral plot is displayed.
Peaks Threshold (dB down or %FS): - specifies the lowest peak amplitude
value that will be listed if List Peaks Below Spectrum has been answered
Yes, or if you click on the Peak List button while viewing a spectrum. If
the Unit Mode for Shaft Voltage measurements is specified in Globals as
dB Units, the peak amplitude is entered as a decibel value below the full
scale value of the amplitude axis. If specified as an engineering unit, then
the value is entered as a percentage of the full-scale value of the amplitude
axis.
Label Peaks on Spectrum? - allows you to place labels on the frequency peaks of
the plotted spectrum.
Number of Peaks to Label: - determines the number of peaks that will be
labeled.

6HWWLQJ'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



$ODUPV
Except for the Peak Voltage and Current Ratio parameters, alarms for shaft probe
measurement parameters are defined as out-of-window alarms. Alarms for Peak
Voltage and Current Ratio parameters are defined as dual upper alarms. Regardless of the type of alarm, the upper Fault and Alert values are absolute values
defined by fields in the tabbed folders labeled General & Peak Voltage Alarms
and Shaft Current & Voltage Alarms. The upper warning alarm and the Peak
Voltage warning alarm are the minimum alarm values determined from the General Shaft Volt/Current Alarms entries.
Lower alarm limits for the AC current and AC voltage measurements are derived
from values calculated with the General Shaft Volt/Current Alarms entries. The
smaller of the values calculated from the Percent of Average and Maximum Percent Delta is used as the Lower Fault limit while the other is defined as the Lower
Alert limit.
Lower Fault and Alert limit values for the DC measurement parameters are the
negative values of their counterpart upper limit values. The Lower Warning limits
for all out-of-window alarms are derived by subtracting the product of the Standard Deviation value times the calculated standard deviation from the average of
the parameter:
Avg Shaft Probe Param Value (Std Devs X Calculated Std Dev of Param)
The Fault limit for the Current Ratio parameter is always 10. Alert and Warning
values are derived from the General Shaft Volt/Current Alarms calculations. The
Alert value is the smaller of the Alarm values calculated from the percent of average
or percent Delta parameters. The Warning alarm is the Warning alarm calculated
from the standard deviation parameter. If the Alert or Warning value is within 0.5
units of the Fault value (10), the associated Current Ratio alarm will not be displayed.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

*HQHUDODQG3HDN9ROWDJH$ODUPV

General and Peak Voltage Alarms:


Overwrite Alarm Limit Set - clicking on this option allows the alarm limits
specified on this tab and on the Shaft Current & Voltage Alarms tab to
overwrite any alarm limits specified in Alarm Limit sets assigned to the
shaft voltage and current points being analyzed.
Percent of Average - The number entered in this field (as a percent) is
applied to the average Shaft probe parameters. The Average Shaft Probe
parameter is calculated similar to the way AMS Machinery Manager calculates average values (for analysis parameters defined within DBASE).
The average is calculated over the number of points equal to the number
of data values in statistical calculation, set on the measurement point definition screen. The amplitude for Upper alarms of Peak Voltage and Current Ratio parameters is calculated as:

$ODUPV



This amplitude is compared with the amplitude value calculated by the


Maximum Percent Delta field, and the larger of these two levels is chosen
as the upper fault level with the requirement that the alert level must be
greater than or equal to the alarm level calculated from the Minimum Percent Absolute value.
The amplitude of the lower alarm for all other parameters is calculated as:

HGDV

The lower alarm value between the Percent of Average and Maximum
Percent Delta is used as the lower fault level. The amplitude of this alarm
level must be greater than or equal to the value of the alarm level calculated
from the Minimum Percent Absolute value.
Maximum Percent Delta - The number in this field (as a percent) multiplied
by the average parameter value is added to the average parameter value to
obtain an Upper limit Alarm for Peak Voltage and Current Ratio parameters only.

The average parameter value divided by the quantity one plus the number
in this field (expressed as a percent) is used to obtain a Lower limit Alarm
value for all other parameters:



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

Minimum Percent Absolute - The number in this field is used to calculate


the minimum percent alarm threshold level for the different parameters.
The threshold is calculated as:



The alarm level values (when being calculated) are compared to this value,
and if they are smaller than this minimum threshold, are set equal to the
minimum threshold.
Standard Deviation - The number in this field is used in conjunction with
standard deviations calculated for the different parameters, to calculate a
potential Upper Warning level. This level is calculated as:



The Calculated Standard Dev is calculated from parameter values similar


to the way AMS Machinery Manager calculates statistical values. The
number of measurements equal to the number of data values in statistical
calculation are used to calculate the average parameter value. This same
set of measurements is used to calculate the Calculated Standard Deviation
of the Parameter values with respect to their Calculated Average Parameter
value. This warning level is then compared with the upper Alert level. If
the ratio of the Average Shaft Probe Parameter Value to the standard deviation is less than a threshold amount, a warning level larger than a calculated Alert or Fault level (which is not an absolute level) will be displayed
and the lower Alert and/or Fault alarm will be ignored.
If the ratio is larger than the threshold amount, a warning level will be displayed only if the value is less than the alarm level. To calculate the lower
Warning alarm for the Shaft Probe, the equation below is used:



$ODUPV



This Warning level is then compared to the lower Alert level. If the ratio of
the Average Shaft Probe Parameter Value to the standard deviation is less
than a threshold amount, a warning level less than a calculated Alert or
Fault level (which is not an absolute level) will be displayed and the lower
Alert and/or Fault alarm will be ignored.
If the ratio is larger than the threshold amount, a warning level will be displayed only if the value is greater than the alarm level.
Shaft Peak Voltage Alarms:
Absolute Fault - The number entered here is the peak voltage value which
is assigned as the Fault level for this parameter.
Absolute Alert - The number entered here is the peak voltage value which
is assigned as the Alert level for these parameters.
6KDIW&XUUHQWDQG9ROWDJH$ODUPV



Shaft Current Absolute Alarms:


AC Fault (mA) - The number entered here is the AC current (mA) value
which is assigned as the Fault level for these parameter.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

AC Alert (mA) - The number entered here is the AC current (mA) value
which is assigned as the Alert level for these parameters.
DC Fault (mA) - The number entered here is the DC current (mA) value
which is assigned as the Fault level for these parameter.
DC Alert (mA) - The number entered here is the DC current (mA) value
which is assigned as the Alert level for these parameters.
Shaft Voltage Absolute Alarms:
AC Fault (V) - The number entered here is the AC voltage (Volts) value
which is assigned as the Fault level for these parameter.
AC Alert (V) - The number entered here is the AC voltage (Volts) value
which is assigned as the Alert level for these parameters.
DC Fault (V) - The number entered here is the DC voltage (Volts) value
which is assigned as the Fault level for these parameter.
DC Alert (V) - The number entered here is the DC voltage (Volts) value
which is assigned as the Alert level for these parameters.

$ODUPV



:DYHIRUP'LVSOD\2SWLRQV



If the Display Time Waveform? option (Display Options page of the Motor Current
Display Option menu) has been selected, this menu will be displayed in order to set
up the waveform display options.
Units for Time Axis: - toggle between Time and Revolutions.
Display Subset of Waveform? - when selected, allows you to specify a time segment
that will be taken from the overall waveform, expanded, and then plotted. The
Start Position and Final Position of the time segment are entered in milliseconds.
When not selected, the waveforms entire time span will be plotted.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled? -when selected, permits the definition of a fixed
amplitude scale (determined by the Lower and Upper Scale values) for each waveform plot. When not selected, the program will use automatic amplitude scaling.
Mark Normalizing Frequency? - includes vertical lines on the plot at intervals corresponding to the speed of the motor.
Grid Lines on Plot? - places a grid overlay on the displayed waveform plot.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

3HUIRUPLQJ6KDIW9ROWDJH&XUUHQW$QDO\VLV
To acquire Shaft Voltage/Current data, the shaft probe (CSI 348SP), attached to
the machinery analyzer, is placed on the shaft of the motor (see Shaft Probe Connection and Measurement on page 7-6 for detailed measurement guidelines).
Shaft current and voltage data are taken on two measurement points. For shaft
voltage data, a shaft voltage spectrum is stored along with three required parameters. These parameters record the overall RMS shaft voltage, the DC shaft voltage
and a peak voltage value. Large peak voltage values are generally the result of large
instantaneous spikes produced from AC and DC drives. For the shaft current data,
a shaft current spectrum is stored along with four required parameters. These
parameters are the AC overall and DC values for current measurements acquired
from two separate circuits. The ratio of these AC current values is also evaluated.
Data can be analyzed through parameter lists, trends and spectral display. How the
data is viewed depends on the Plots to Display option selected on the Analysis
Option menu. Examples and explanations for each of the display modes follow.
'LVSOD\LQJ6SHFWUDDQG$QDO\VHV

A screen like the one shown below will be displayed if Plots to Display? on the
Shaft Voltage/Current Options screen was set to Spectrum.



)LJXUH'LVSOD\RIDVSHFWUXPUHSUHVHQWLQJDVKDIWYROWDJHPHDVXUHPHQW

$ODUPV



Results of MotorViews analysis for each selected spectrum is displayed on the


Results of Shaft Probe Analysis screen shown in figure 7-2. This screen provides
information concerning the measured data.



)LJXUH$VKDIWSUREHDQDO\VLVW\SLFDOO\SURGXFHVWKLVNLQGRIDQDO\VLVUHSRUW

Area: ID and Area name for associated measurement


Equipment: ID and Equipment name for associated measurement
Meas Point: ID and measurement point name
Date/Time - The date and time that the data for the currently selected spectrum
was collected.
RPS/RPM - The stored RPS or RPM of the motor at the time data was collected.
LOAD - The stored load of the motor (in percent) at the time data were collected.
Analysis parameter: The identification of the stored parameter.
Parameter Value: Stored in RMS units unless otherwise indicated. For shaft current measurements, if the AC overall (CUR1) value is more than 10 times the
CUR2 value, a note will be displayed below the analysis list indicating potential shaft
current problems.
Warn/Alert/Fault Levels: Alarm limits for each parameter.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

Alarm Code: A letter value in this column indicates an alarm has been surpassed.
See Fig 6-8 - Alarm Codes on page 6-29.

&RPPXQLFDWLQJ5HVXOWVWR$060DFKLQHU\0DQDJHU
Because Shaft Current/Voltage problems are based on exceeding pre-defined
alarm and fault levels, this type data does not get written as a case history to RBMview. However, just as with all the motor analysis types, a Shaft Current Voltage
alarm level analysis type is updated after any analysis of a shaft current or voltage
measurement point. The result of the analysis is a severity tied to the alarm level
analysis type.

4XLFN(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
This evaluation method will greatly expedite diagnosis. In this mode, shaft probe
parameters can be shown quickly on one summary sheet. With this option, an
entire route can be evaluated in a manner of minutes.
As shown in the figure below, the parameter values are listed for each measurement. Displaying data in this manner is accomplished by setting (on the Shaft
Voltage/Current Options menu) the Plots to Display field to None. The display
will also indicate when the current ratio is excessive.



$ODUPV



Point ID - Three character Identification of the shaft probe measurement point.


This identifier will indicate either a shaft current (SHC defined by MotorView) or
shaft Voltage (SHV defined by MotorView).
Acquisition Date/Time - The date and time the data was acquired.
Current Parameters (RMS mAmps) - The five subheadings below this heading display the results of the shaft current measurements. Ideally, for motors with no shaft
current problems, the AC and DC current values of Resistor R1 should be equal to
the AC and DC current values of Resistor R2 (assuming a current source). The
ratio of AC current values from Resistor R1 to Resistor R2 should be less than 10. If
the ratio for the AC readings for R1/R2 is greater than 10, a message will be displayed at the bottom of the analysis sheet which reads: The AC ratio of current 1
to current 2 is excessive. Therefore, a low bearing resistance is possible. This provides the potential for destructive shaft currents.
Voltage Parameters - The three subheadings below this heading display the results
of the shaft voltage measurements. The AC and DC shaft voltage measurements
are displayed in volts. These are RMS or average-type readings. Since voltage spikes
(generally caused by AC variable frequency or DC drive units) do not have enough
energy to influence the average voltage readings, the Volts Peak parameter provides a value of the instantaneous energy generated from voltage spikes. The units
for this parameter is peak voltage.



6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

7UHQG(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG
Analysis of the shaft current and voltage condition for a particular motor over time
can be visually displayed as a trend of each parameter. These trends can be plotted
by selecting Trend for the Plots to Display field. By selecting the Trend option,
eight screens will be displayed (5 for shaft currents and 3 for shaft voltages). Provided the alarm display levels are enabled on the Display Options tab of the Shaft
Voltage/Current Options menu, each plot will display the calculated alarms
described in Alarms on page 7-16.
The first shaft current trend plot below displays the RMS AC current value from the
first current circuit versus time.



7UHQG(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG



The second shaft current trend plot shown below displays the DC current value
from the first current circuit versus time. Note the value for this measurement can
be negative.



The third shaft current trend plot shown below displays the RMS AC current value
from the second current circuit versus time.





6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

The fourth shaft current trend plot shown below displays the DC current value
from the second current circuit versus time. Note the value for this measurement
can be negative.



The last shaft current trend shown below plots the ratio of AC current from circuit
one to the AC current from circuit two. The Fault limit level of 10 is not user
defined.



7UHQG(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG



The first shaft voltage trend plot shown below displays the RMS AC voltage value
versus time.



The second shaft voltage trend plot shown below displays the DC voltage value
versus time. Note the value for this measurement can be negative.





6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

The third shaft voltage trend shown below plots the peak voltage value (in units of
volts peak) resulting from instantaneous voltage spikes. These spikes are typically
generated from AC variable frequency or DC drive units and occur at line frequency times the number of pulses used from the motor drive.



7UHQG(YDOXDWLRQ0HWKRG





6KDIW3UREH$QDO\VLV 0RWRU9LHZ,,2QO\

$SSHQGL[ $

$XWRPDWLF7HPSHUDWXUH'DWD$FTXLVLWLRQ

2YHUYLHZ
You can acquire temperature data automatically by using a Model 505, 510, or 515
temperature probe. Using a Model 510 in the Digital mode provides these additional advantages:
Better accuracy
Ability to automate and speed up the data collection process
The Model 515 collects data only in the digital mode.

$XWRPDWLF7HPSHUDWXUH'DWD&ROOHFWLRQ:LWKD3UREH
For automatic temperature data collection, the following equipment is needed:
Data Collectors:
Model 2115 with firmware version 6.40 or later
Model 2117 with firmware version 6.40 or later
Model 2120 with firmware version 7.14a of later
Cables and Adapters:
Stereo cable supplied with 515 to connect to 21xx
Model 625T adapter -- to connect to data port of 21xx
Complete these steps to set up and use the 515 with the data collector. In the data
collector:
1.

Enter the Utility function.

2.

Select Change Setup.

3.

Select Operational PRMS.

4.

Set the Operational Parameters as follows:


KEY BEEPER - ON

$

SENSR BUTTON - ON
CTRL PRM 1 - ON
CTRL PRM 2 - ON or AUTO
5.

Press enter to accept the changes.

6.

Select Measurement Mode.

7.

Press Page (to go to the second page), and display Set Measurement
Mode menu.

8.

Toggle the Temperature Probe selection to 515.

9.

Press Enter to accept the changes.

The data collector is now set up to collect temperature data using a Model 515
probe. Load a route with appropriately configured points and begin data collection. Pressing the trigger on the 515 will start the data collector. When a satisfactory
reading is displayed on the probe, releasing the trigger will save the reading to the
route point.

$XWRPDWLF7HPSHUDWXUH'DWD&ROOHFWLRQ:LWKD3UREH
For automatic temperature data collection, you need the following equipment:
Data Collectors:
Model 2115 with firmware version 6.03 or later
Model 2117
Model 2120
Cables: (to connect the 510 to the data collector)
615-D cable or
342-C cable with a 342-510-A adapter cable
Complete these steps to set up and use the data collector:
1.

Enter the Utility function.

2.

Select Change Setup.

3.

Select Operational PRMS.

4.

Set the Operational Parameters as described:


KEY BEEPER - ON

$

SENSR BUTTON - ON
CTRL PRM 1 - ON
CTRL PRM 2 - ON
AUTO PWROFF - 10.
WAVFRM SIZE - 1024
1RWH

Ctrl PRM 2 can be set to AUTO.


5.

Press Enter to accept the changes.

6.

Select Measurement Mode.

7.

Press Page (to go to Page 2 of the menu) to display the Set


Measurement Mode menu.

8.

Move the cursor to Temperature Probe, toggle the selection, and choose
510.

9.

Press keypad (F6 on the 2120) and select the Digital mode.

On the Model 510 probe:


10. Select the Digital mode.
To acquire temperatures (in a route) with the 510 Digital probe, go to the temperature measurement point, press the trigger, and hold until the desired temperature
is displayed on the analyzer screen. When the trigger is released, the last value displayed will be recorded in the analyzer.

$XWRPDWLF7HPSHUDWXUH'DWD&ROOHFWLRQ:LWKD3UREH
For automatic temperature data collection, you need the following equipment.
Data Collectors:
Model 2115 with firmware version 6.03 or later
Model 2117
Model 2120
Cables: (to connect the 505 to the data collector)

$

615-C cable or
342-C cable with a 342-505-A adapter cable
631/631S/632/632S cable with a 342-505-A adapter cable
1RWH

For proactive temperature measurements, CSI recommends using


the 342-C cable with a 342-505-A adapter cable.
Complete these steps to set up the data collector:
1.

Enter the Utility function.

2.

Select Change Setup.

3.

Select Operational PRMS.

4.

Set the Operational Parameters as described:


KEY BEEPER - ON
SENSR BUTTON - ON
CTRL PRM 1 - ON
CTRL PRM 2 - ON
AUTO PWROFF - 10.
WAVFRM SIZE - 1024
1RWH

Ctrl PRM 2 can be set to AUTO.

$

5.

Press Enter to accept the changes.

6.

Select Measurement Mode.

7.

Press Page (to go to Page 2 of the menu) to display the Set


Measurement Mode menu.

8.

Move the cursor to Temperature Probe, toggle the selection, and choose
505.

Complete these steps to use the data collector:


1.

Step the analyzer to the temperature measurement point.

2.

Press the red button (after 0.7 seconds, the analyzer will display a
temperature).

3.

When the temperature reading is satisfactory, release the red button (the
temperature will be recorded in the analyzer).
&DXWLRQ

Do not double click the red button this can send random signals to the analyzer
and cause incorrect readings.

$

$QDORJ7HPSHUDWXUH'DWD&ROOHFWLRQ
To use the Model 505 and 510 probes in manual mode, you need the following
equipment.
Data Collectors:
Model 2115, 2117, or 2120
Cables: (to connect the 505 or 510 to the data collector)
Any of the cable combinations previously listed for use with the 505 probe
Complete these steps to use the data collector:

$

1.

Ensure that the 2115/2117/2120 is in the regular collection mode.

2.

Go to the temperature measurement point and push the button on the 505
(trigger on the 510).

3.

Press the Enter key (on 2115/2117/2120) to begin collecting data.

4.

When the reading stabilizes, press the data collector Enter key again (the
temperature will be recorded to the route point in the analyzer).

5.

Release the button (or trigger) on the probe and advance the data
collector to the next measurement point.

$SSHQGL[ %

)OX[$QDO\VLV4XLFN5HIHUHQFH*XLGH

)OX[&RLO6DPSOH'DWD
The table on the following page summarizes the results of CSI motor testing performed in the development of the MotorView II product. This data has served as
the basis for the flux coil analysis feature which is presented in Chapter 5 of this
manual. Based on present understanding (at the time of this manuals printing),
this Appendix explains and shows the implications of the information in the table
for the diagnosis of electrical related problems in AC induction motors.

%

(OHFWULF
&XUUHQW

)OX[$QDO\VLV /RZ)UHTXHQF\

'HVFULSWLRQ
$PSO'LII $PSO'LII /)1[536
RI)DXOW
/)13[6)
/)13[6) 

)OX[$QDO\VLV 6ORW3DVV
)DPLO\RI3HDNV

$PSORI
/)13 536


[/) 363


6SHHGDERXW
[/) 363 


5RWRUEDU

'HFUHDVH

'HFUHDVH

1RFKDQJH

1RFKDQJH

"

"

2SHQ
ZLQGLQJ

1RFKDQJH

'HFUHDVH

,QFUHDVH

,QFUHDVH

9DULDWLRQ

9DULDWLRQ

7XUQWRWXUQ
1RFKDQJH
ZLQGLQJVKRUW

'HFUHDVH

,QFUHDVH

3RVVLEOH
LQFUHDVH

9DULDWLRQ

9DULDWLRQ

/RZ
UHVLVWDQFHWR
JURXQG

1RFKDQJH

1RFKDQJH 1RFKDQJH

1RFKDQJH

1RFKDQJH 1RFKDQJH

9ROWDJH
8QEDODQFH

1RFKDQJH

'HFUHDVH ,QFUHDVH
ZH[WUHPH
98

,QFUHDVH

"

"

,QFUHDVHG
ORDG

6OLJKW
YDULDWLRQ

6OLJKW
YDULDWLRQ

1RFKDQJH

6OLJKW
LQFUHDVH

6OLJKW
LQFUHDVH

6OLJKW
LQFUHDVH

 3DUDPHWHULVWKHHQHUJ\RIWKHUXQQLQJVSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWOLQHIUHTXHQF\
 3DUDPHWHUFDOFXODWHGIURP[/)IDPLO\RIVORWSDVVIUHTXHQFLHVDVIROORZV
$)RUHDFKIUHTXHQF\ZKHUHWKHFRPSDULVRQDPSOLWXGH!UHIDPSOLWXGHFDOFXODWHWKHHQHUJ\RIWKH
GLIIHUHQFHDVIROORZV,QFUHDVHHQHUJ\ VTUW VXPRIWKH VTXDUHVRI FRPSUHI
%)RUHDFKIUHTXHQF\ZKHUHWKHFRPSDULVRQDPSOLWXGHUHIDPSOLWXGHFDOFXODWHWKHHQHUJ\RIWKH
GLIIHUHQFHDVIROORZV'HFUHDVHHQHUJ\ VTUW VXPRIWKH VTXDUHVRI UHIFRPS
&8VHWKHODUJHURIWKHSDUDPHWHUVFDOFXODWHGLQ$DQG%WRFDOFXODWHWKHWUHQGSDUDPHWHU
'&DOFXODWHWKHWRWDOVORWSDVVIDPLO\HQHUJ\IRUWKHUHIHUHQFHVSHFWUXP
(7UHQGSDUDPHWHU WKHYDOXHIRXQGLQ&GLYLGHGE\WKHRQHGHWHUPLQHGLQ'
 )ROORZWKHVDPHSURFHGXUHRXWOLQHGLQIRRWQRWHDERYHH[FHSWWKHIUHTXHQFLHVEHLQJHYDOXDWHG
DUHWKHUXQQLQJVSHHGVLGHEDQGVDERXWHDFKPHPEHURIWKH[/)IDPLO\RISHDNV
6DPSOH)OX[&RLO'DWD

%

([SODQDWLRQRI6DPSOH'DWD
Along the horizontal axis, this chart shows two different types of measurements,
electric current and magnetic flux, with the latter differentiated into two different
frequency ranges, low frequency and slot pass frequencies.
The electric current measurement refers to the detection of rotor bar faults by use
of a clip-on ammeter to collect a high resolution snapshot of the low frequency current spectra. Comparison of the amplitude of the line frequency peak to the amplitude of the NPxSF sideband on the low frequency side of the line frequency peak
is the parameter which is monitored:
ORZHUVLGHEDQGIUHTXHQF\ /)13[6)

where:
SF = slip frequency
LF = line frequency
NP = number of poles
RPM = running speed of the motor (rev/min)
and slip frequency is defined as:
SF = 2 x LF/NP RPM/60
1RWH

Line frequency is typically 60 Hz in the USA, and 50 Hz in much of


the rest of the world.
The vertical column on the far left of the table lists various types of faults which have
been induced in different motors, and various operating parameters which have
been varied to test their influence on possible parameters which could be monitored in a motor by electric current or magnetic flux measurements. These faults
include inducing varying numbers of rotor bar faults in rotors, inducing stator
faults which include having one voltage phase disconnected, placing turn-to-turn
shorts in stator windings, and introducing low resistance paths to ground from
stator windings. In addition the voltage balance between the three phases of a typical three phase motor has been unbalanced voltage-wise in a controlled manner,
and the effect of motor loading has been studied by varying the loads from uncoupled to more than full load.

%

The electric current diagnostic for rotor bar faults presents an example of a very
clean diagnostic measure. The second column reveals that the only parameter
which has an obvious impact on the magnitude of this parameter is the number of
broken rotor bars. This is a very nice situation, because it indicates that independent of the stator condition, independent of the voltage balance of the supply
voltage for the motor, and with only a slight variation in motor load (which above
50% load can be compensated for), monitoring this parameter will provide a measure on the number of broken bars in the rotor.
The parameters displayed for the magnetic flux measurements do not have the
same single valued characteristic exhibited by the electric current measurement,
but this does not preclude the use of these parameters to monitor for motor electrical faults. The flux measurements have the additional advantage of enhanced
safety in that access to electrical wiring is not required. In most plant settings this
should allow on-line flux data to be collected by non-electrical personnel. The first
low frequency flux parameter is the same line frequency sideband monitored by
the electric current probe, namely the number of poles x slip frequency (NPxSF)
sideband of line frequency, on the low frequency side of the line frequency peak.
The table indicates that this parameter has a slight variation with motor load, and
decreases with increasing rotor bar faults, with turn-to-turn shorts in a stator
winding, with an open stator winding, and decreases slightly with extreme voltage
unbalance.
Additional research has shown that this parameter varies with the number of
broken rotor bars proportional to the way the parameter varies for electric current
measurements. The actual value that the parameter has when monitored in flux is
not necessarily equal to its value when monitored in electric current, but it varies
with the number of broken bars in the same manner. Monitoring a low frequency,
high resolution, flux spectrum will give a spectrum with a line frequency peak with
some amplitude, and a (LF - NPxSF) sideband peak with some amplitude. The
ratio of these two amplitudes is the actual parameter trended. In the flux spectra
this ratio will have some value, and whether this value is large or small in magnitude
has no absolute meaning. The flux data can be calibrated by correlating the reference flux spectra with a measure of the same parameter from an electric current
spectrum collected preferably within 1/2 hour of the flux spectra, when the motor
is running under the same load (hence running at the same speed). MotorView II
software is able to utilize this calibration for subsequent flux coil spectra, and correlate the flux measure of the rotor bar parameter against this one calibrated electric
current measurement.

%

As long as the only problem developing in the motor is a rotor bar problem, the
flux measurement gives a good indication of the degree of the developing fault.
However the table shows that this parameter also decreases due to some stator
related faults. A decrease in this parameter is what the low frequency MotorView II
analysis interprets as a developing rotor bar fault. This is the reason that on page 5-6
there is a Caution to the user to always verify rotor bar faults indicated by flux coil
analysis with an independent electric current measurement to verify that the
problem is rotor related, prior to pulling the motor off-line to send for repair. In
practice the alarm could be due to stator related problems, or even to severe
voltage unbalance.
The LF +/- NxRPS parameter refers to spectral peaks in the low frequency flux
spectrum which are sidebands of running speed about line frequency (N is an
integer). Different members of this sideband family are observed to increase when
stator faults are induced in motors. One example of this is given in Shorted
Winding Turns on page 5-11. At this point more case histories are needed to
develop the information base needed to reliably call faults based on these observations.
The particular running speed sideband about line frequency spaced at LF + NP/2
x RPS has been shown in previous work [5] to be sensitive to voltage unbalance.
The case history shown as [unbalanced Voltage Supply on p 5-8] illustrates the
appearance of this behavior on a specific two pole, 5 HP motor in a laboratory setting. It is important at this point to note that the amplitude of this particular sideband has also been observed to increase in response to stator related faults, of
which the particular case of an open winding is a extreme example of voltage
unbalance.

%

The last two flux parameters refer to peaks seen in a high frequency flux spectrum,
where the peaks are members of one of two different sideband families. The first
family consists of 2 x LF sidebands about the principal slot pass frequency peak,
while the second family consists of running speed sidebands about any of the 2 x
LF sidebands or the principal slot pass frequency peak. Individual members of
these families have been observed to respond, in many cases quite significantly,
either increasing or decreasing in amplitude, in response to different stator related
faults. Case histories illustrating this behavior are shown in High Frequency Flux
Case History on page 5-15. As shown in the case histories the MotorView II software presently displays an analysis screen, illustrated by Fig 5-11, which lists any
peaks in this high frequency flux spectrum which have shown a significant increase
or decrease relative to the reference high frequency flux spectrum stored for each
measurement point. At this time more case histories are needed to provide the
knowledge base upon which to confidently call particular stator faults in response
to these spectral changes. Presently the MotorView II software trends parameters
which are the sum of the spectral energy in these two sideband families as a possible
flag for stator related degradation within AC induction motors.

%

$SSHQGL[ &

6KDIW3UREH0HDVXUHPHQWVDQG$FTXLVLWLRQ

2YHUYLHZ
This Appendix provides you with the following information:
Step-by-step instructions for setting up Shaft Probe measurement points and
routes in AMS Machinery Manager/MotorView.
Step-by-step instructions for setting up the CSI 2115/2117 and 2120 Analyzers for Shaft Probe measurements
Shaft Probe calibration recommendations
Suggestions for making measurements with the Shaft Probe
1RWH

Review the Shaft probe Instruction Sheet packed with the Shaft
Probe for the latest information on using the Shaft Probe.

:DUQLQJ

Using the Shaft Probe is inherently hazardous since you are placing
the transducer in contact with a rotating shaft. Exercise extreme care
to keep all body parts, clothing, and cables away from the shaft. Never
wrap a cable around your body to keep it away from the shaft during
the measurement! Computational Systems, Inc. highly recommends
inspecting the shaft surface thoroughly. Viewing the shaft with a
strobe light prior to measurements, it should be possible to detect
obstructions or hazards such as a key or key way. CSI assumes no
responsibility for injury or damage due to use of the Model 348SP
Shaft Probe.

&

'HILQLQJ3RLQWVDQG5RXWHV
1.

Enter MotorView II (menu SA01), select a AMS Machinery Manager


database, and select Setup DBASE (under Tools).

2.

Under Tools, either select an existing area or create a new one.

3.

Under Tools, either select an existing piece of equipment or create a new


one.

4.

Define the motor ID in the Motor File/Motor ID Number field in the


Define Motor Points (menu MU06) and click OK to advance to the
next menu screen.

&

5.

On Menu MU07, select SHC Shaft Current/Voltage (place an X in


box next to this field) and click OK to create shaft current/voltage
measurement points (SHC - Shaft Current and SHV - Shaft Voltage) and
AP Sets.

6.

Exit MotorView and enter Route Management (screen FA01). Either


edit an existing route or create a new route and add the two shaft current/
voltage measurement points.

7.

Exit Route Management and enter CSICOM. Load the route into the
Analyzer.

8.

In the Analyzer under Utility/Change Setup/Operational Parameters,


toggle SENSR BUTON, CTRL PRM 1, and CTRL PRM 2 to ON
and press the Enter key.

9.

In the Model 2120 Analyzer under Utility/Change Setup/Measurement


Mode, press the Page key to advance to the second page. Toggle
SHAFT PROBE to ON.
In the Model 2115/2117 Analyzer under Utility/Change Setup/Measurement Mode, press the Page key to advance to the third page. Toggle
SHAFT PROBE to ON.

10. In the Model 2115/2117 or 2120 Analyzer under Utility/Change Setup/


Measurement Mode, toggle CHAN/GROUP ENABLE to ON.

&DOLEUDWLRQ
If this is the first time the Shaft Probe has been used, if the firmware
has been reloaded, or if you have changed probes or analyzers, the calibration factors should be entered and the DC offset calibration should
be performed.

&

To enter the calibration values, first make sure Shaft Probe is highlighted in the data collector. (To find this, press the Utility key, then
select Change Setup, and finally Measurement Mode from the
menus.) Next, press the F6 key in the Model 2120 Analyzer or the
Keypad key in the Model 2115/2117 Analyzer and enter the calibration
factors. The calibration values for the probe are on a label attached to
the probe handle.
To calibrate the DC offset of the Shaft Probe, press the Page key and
follow the instructions displayed on the analyzer screen.
When finished, press the Enter key. See Making Connections and
Attaching Shaft Probe to Analyzer below for more information.

0DNLQJ&RQQHFWLRQVDQG$WWDFKLQJ6KDIW3UREHWR$QDO\]HU
1.

Connect the Lemo connector of the coiled cable and the banana plug
connector of the grounding cable to the matching connections at the end
of the Shaft Probe handle.

2.

Connect the 25-pin D connector of the coiled cable to the 25-pin


connector at the top of the analyzer.

3.

When calibrating the DC offset of the Shaft Probe, clamp the ground
onto the Shaft Probe brush.

4.

When making a shaft current/voltage measurement, clamp the ground


clamp to a bare metal location on the equipment casing (e.g. a bolt head,
threaded rod, or grounding strap).

6XJJHVWLRQVIRU0DNLQJ6KDIW&XUUHQW9ROWDJH0HDVXUHPHQWV
1.

&

To make a shaft current/voltage measurement, select the route with the


shaft current/voltage measurement points, select either the shaft current
or shaft voltage measurement point. To start data collection, press the
enter key on the data collector or press the button on the shaft probe. We
recommend pressing the button on the shaft probe; this is explained by
the following suggestions.

2.

Inspect shafts with a strobe light before contacting the surface for
cleaning or making measurements. Look for obstructions, keys, or key
ways, which could interfere with the measurements or grab/impact
tools. Although, with care, measurements can be made across key ways,
sharp edges will wear the Shaft Probe brush faster than a smooth shaft.

3.

Clean the shaft first with a wire brush or other suitable materials. While
the shaft brush will self clean many shafts, this will tend to wear the
brush prematurely as excessive pressure may be required.

4.

Replace worn Shaft Probe brushes. Shaft probe brushes with flattened
bristles or excessive wear will be more likely to give erratic readings.
Firmly grip the lower half of the shaft rod, attached directly to the probe
handle, (to prevent turning inside the handle) while unscrewing the shaft
brush. Replace the shaft brush with CSI part number 99460.

5.

Applying the Shaft Probe to the shaft:


(a) Have all cables, including the grounding clamp, properly connected before initiating the shaft measurement.
(b) Carefully, place the brush against the rotating shaft with steady, but
not excessive pressure. Try to contact the shaft approximately midpoint along the bristled portion of the brush. Contact the shaft surface in an area rotating away from you. Do not allow the uninsulated parts of the Shaft Probe to touch any metal surface (e.g.
the bearing face) except the rotating shaft, as this could shunt the
voltage being measured to ground before it enters the measurement
circuitry.
(c) After the Shaft Probe is in place against the shaft, press the button
on the Shaft Probe to begin the data acquisition. It is important to
keep your attention focused on the Shaft Probe and your hand. Do
not try to watch the analyzer display. When the measurement is
complete, the red LED on the Shaft Probe will flash on/off every
0.5 seconds for 5 times. Remove the Shaft Probe from the shaft
before turning your attention back to the analyzer.

6.

After the data has been acquired, it can be viewed in the analyzer or the
route can be dumped back to the database, via CSICOM, for analysis by
the MotorView II software.

&

&

5HIHUHQFHV

[1]

Thomson, W. T., R. A. Leonard, A. J. Maine, and J. Penman, Failure Identification of Offshore Induction Motor Systems Using On-line Condition Monitoring, Proceeding of 4th National Reliability Conference, Birmingham,
UK, 1983.

[2]

Brancato, E.L., Estimation of Lifetime Expectancies of Motors, IEEE Electrical Insulation Magazine, Vol. 8, No. 3, May/June 1992.

[3]

Montsinger, V.M., Loading Transformers by Temperature, AIEE Trans.


Vol. 32, 1913.

[4]

Obenhaus, R.E., Motor Thermal Protection Minimizes Downtime, in Electric Motor Manual, McGraw-Hill, Inc. 1987, pp. 99-102.

[5]

Michael S. Erlicki, Yigal Porat, and A. Alexandrovitz, Leakage Field


Changes of an Induction Motor as Indication of Nonsymmetric Supply,
IEEE Trans. on Industry and General Applications, Vol IGA-7, pp 713-717,
Nov/Dec 1971.

[6]

Alger, P. and Samson, H., Shaft Currents in Electric Machines, A.I.R.E.


Conference, Feb. 1924.

[7]

Boyanton, Hugh (Shaft Grounding Systems, Inc., Albany, Oregon), Electrically Induced Bearing Damage, The Need for Shaft Grounding, CSI Users'
Conference, 1994, Nashville, TN.

[8]

Walker, Peter, Preventing Motor Shaft-Current Bearing Failures, pp.90-93,


Plant Engineering, October 4, 1990.

[9]

EPRI Power Electronics Applications Center, Preventing Premature Failure


of Bearings in Motors Driven by PWM ASDs, PEAC Application Note no.
8, May 1996, Knoxville, TN.

[10] Busse, D., Erdman, J., Kerkman, R.J., Schlegel, D., and Skibinski, G.,
Bearing Currents and Their Relationship to PWM Drives, IECON 95, IEEE
21st Annual Industrial Electronics Conference, Nov 6-10, 1995, Vol I, pp.
698-705.

5

[11] Costello, Michael J. (Magnetic Products and Services, Inc., Holmdel, NJ),
Shaft Voltages and Rotating Machinery, IEEE Paper No. PCIC-91-13, July,
1991.
[12] Boyd, J. and Kaufman, H. N., The Causes and the Control of Electrical Currents in Bearings, Lubrication Engineering, January, 1959.
[13] Bearing Installation and Maintenance Guide, SKF 140-710, pp. 80-81,
August, 1988.
[9]

Bearing Failure Prevention Guide, FAFNIR, pp. 14-15.

[14] Erdman, J., Kerkman, R.J., Schlegal, D., and Skibinski, G., Effect of PWM
Inverters on AC Motor Bearing Currents and Shaft Voltages, APEC 95,
Tenth Annual Applied Electronics Conference and Exposition, March 5-9,
1995, Vol I, pp 24-33.
[15] Busse, D., Erdman, J., Kerkman, R.J., Schlegal, D., and Skibinski, G.,
System Electrical Parameters and Their Effects on Bearing Currents, APEC
96, Eleventh Annual Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition,
March 3-7, 1996.
[16] Busse, D., Erdman, J., Kerkman, R.J., Schlegal, D., and Skibinski, G., The
Effects of PWM Voltage Source Inverters on the Mechanical Performance of
Rolling Bearings, APEC 96, Eleventh Annual Applied Power Electronics
Conference and Exposition, March 3-7, 1996.

5

*ORVVDU\

$FFHOHUDWLRQ

A measure of the rate of change of velocity of an object, usually measured in gs (1


g represents the acceleration due to gravity). The sensor used to measure acceleration is the accelerometer.
$FRXVWLFV

The study of the characteristics of sound.


$ODUP

An indication that the vibration or other parameters of a machine have changed


in a significant manner.
$ODUP/LPLWV

Amplitude levels which define an alarm condition on the machine being monitored.
$OHUW

An alarm limit calculated by the MasterTrend software which indicates that a


machine is approaching failure. Designated as a C alarm in reports.
$OLDVLQJ

An effect that results in erroneous frequency spectra when the frequency of the
signal being sampled is more than 0.5 times the sampling rate. CSI analyzers
include anti-aliasing filters that eliminate these errors.
$PSOLILFDWLRQ

Increasing signal amplitude by a desired amount in order to facilitate further


processing of the signal.
$PSOLWXGH

Indicates the strength (magnitude in RMS, peak, peak-to-peak, average, or


D.C.) of a measured signal.

*

$QDORJ,QWHJUDWLRQ

A method for converting a signal proportional to acceleration to the equivalent


velocity signal, or converting a signal proportional to velocity to the equivalent
displacement signal. Analog integration is superior to the equivalent digital
method because it produces a better estimate of low-frequency components in
the vibration spectrum, and improves dynamic range.
$QDO\VLV3DUDPHWHUV

Divides the frequency spectrum into bands that are individually measured and
analyzed.
$QDO\VLV3DUDPHWHU6HW

Includes individual analysis parameters, and also contains instructions that tell
the machinery analyzer how to acquire data.
$UHD

A grouping of equipment within a company or a plant for the purpose of predictive maintenance; may include the entire facility or a logical division thereof;
can then be subdivided into routes of machines for data collection.
$XWRUDQJH

The process of automatically adjusting the input instrumentation amplifier of


the analyzer to match the amplitude of the vibration signal. This process results
in increased dynamic range.
$YHUDJLQJ

A method of collecting data in which the mean levels over a number of spectral
measurements minimize the influence of random noise fluctuations.
$:HLJKWLQJ

A frequency shaping method that can be applied to a spectra based upon the frequency response of the human ear. The resulting spectra represents the loudness
of the various levels as they would appear to the human ear.
%DQGZLGWK

The analysis frequency range, from lowest to highest, over which data will be
collected. Bandwidth is specified with a minimum and maximum frequency.

*

%DVHOLQH

A reference spectrum, usually the first spectra collected on a measurement


point.
%DXG5DWH

Unit of speed for data transmission over a serial communications link.


%ORFN

Database size is specified in blocks. One block = 0.5 Kilobytes.


%3),

For rolling element bearings, the ball pass frequency (inner), a defect in the
inner race of a bearing.
%3)2

For rolling element bearings, the ball pass frequency (outer), a defect in the
outer race of a bearing.
%6)

Bearing ball spin frequency for rolling element bearings.


&DOLEUDWLRQ

The procedure by which instruments and transducers are checked and adjusted
in order to obtain accurate readings.
&30

The unit of frequency in cycles per minute. Equal to Hz x 60.


&UHVW)DFWRU

The ratio of peak to RMS levels of a signal. A single-frequency signal has a crest
factor of 1.414; random noise has a crest factor of approximately 3; signals with
impulsive content have higher crest factor values. The crest factor can be used
to check for impacting, such as caused by rolling bearing defects.
&XUVRU

A manually controlled marker that can be moved across a spectrum or waveform plot display indicating time or frequency and amplitude at the cursor location.

*

'DWD8QLWV

The units that are used to display the measured data. The analyzer can display
data in the sensors units (no conversion), or vibration sensor units can be converted to acceleration, velocity, or displacement.
G%

(decibels) a relative, logarithmic unit which can be used when measuring signal
amplitude, defined as follows:

Where ; is the quantity being measured, and ;UHI is a standard reference value of
that quantity
'LDJQRVWLFV

The techniques by which machine problems are identified and analyzed.


'LJLWDO,QWHJUDWLRQ

A method of converting acceleration to velocity or velocity to displacement by


first collecting the spectral data and then digitally converting the spectra at each
frequency.
'LVSODFHPHQW

Refers to the distance that an object moves, usually considered to be the overall
range of movement; measured in mils or microns. Displacement is often measured from eddy current probes and represents the physical movement of a
rotating shaft relative to its supporting bearing.
Sometimes accelerometers or velocity probes are used, and the data is integrated
into displacement. In this case, movement represents the displacement of the
machine casing where the probe is mounted.
'ULYHUV

System software that enables the operation of the MasterTrend program modules. A diskette containing the drivers is provided with all CSI software.

*

(QYHORSH:LQGRZV

Used in envelope detection to divide a spectrum into multiple bands to establish


alarm levels.
(TXLSPHQW

A combination of components in one service unit, such as a motor coupled to a


pump.
))7

Fast Fourier Transform; an efficient computational process which allows the


conversion of a signals time waveform into a frequency spectrum.
)DXOW

An alarm level which indicates that a machine or component has failed. Designated as a D alarm in reports.
)DXOW)UHTXHQF\6HW

A set of pre-defined frequencies where mechanical faults are expected to occur.


)LOWHU

A device which removes certain frequencies from a signal while preserving the
rest of the signal.
)LUPZDUH

A term referring to the internal software that controls or instructs the functions
of the analyzer.
)OX[&RLO

The CSI Flux Coil is a device which attaches to electric motors to capture flux signals. This provides an electrical quality signature which is sensitive to conditions
that alter the electrical characteristics of the motor (broken rotor bars, eccentricity,
imbalance between phases, and stator faults).

*

)OX[6SHFWUD

Motor flux spectra are acquired with CSIs Flux Coil. The low frequency spectrum is a high resolution spectrum with a maximum frequency of at least three
times running speed, or two times line frequency (whichever is greater). Analysis of
this spectrum provides information on the rotor condition, changes in voltage balance and some stator fault detection. The high frequency spectrum contains slot
pass family frequencies which provide indication of stator related faults.
)UHTXHQF\

Number of times an event repeats in a unit of time; usually expressed in hertz


(Hz) or cycles per minute (CPM).
)XQGDPHQWDO)UHTXHQF\

The frequency of the peak from which related harmonics are referenced.
1xRPM is an example of a fundamental frequency.
JV

The unit of measure for acceleration; 1 g is defined as the acceleration due to


gravity at sea level.
*HDU0HVK)UHTXHQF\

Asynchronous vibration frequency associated with each pair of meshing gears.


Calculated as RPM divided by 60 times the number of teeth on a particular gear.
*OREDO

A change or changes made to the entire database.


+DQQLQJ

Type of window applied to waveform data before frequency analysis; used to


prevent peaks in a frequency spectrum from spreading out due to a phenomenon
called leakage. The Hanning window is recommended for most frequency analysis measurements where the signal is steady-state.
+DUPRQLF

An integer multiple of a fundamental frequency f0 (example 2f0, 3f0, 4f0, etc.).


+DUPRQLF0DUNHU

A box marker that appears on a spectrum display to indicate the harmonic peaks
of a fundamental peak.

*

+HUW] +]

The unit of frequency in cycles per second.


+)'

High-frequency detection; the amplitude of vibration in gs over a broad frequency band from 5 kHz up to 20 kHz or greater.
,&0

Influence Coefficient Method; the method used by the CSIs Balancing programs to calculate balancing solutions.
/LQHV

The number of lines of resolution used for the spectrum calculation. Resolution
(in Hz) equals maximum frequency divided by the number of Lines.
/RFDO'DWD

Data taken in the off-route mode of the machinery analyzer.


0HDVXUHPHQW3RLQW

Any location or point on a piece of equipment where measurements are made.


0LFURQ V

A metric unit of measurement (one millionth of a meter).


0LO V

A unit of measure for displacement (one thousandth of an inch).


0RGHP

A device that enables remote communications between the host computer and a
machinery analyzer over telephone lines.
0RGXODWLRQ

Instantaneous variations in a signals characteristics. May be amplitude (AM) or


frequency (FM) modulation.

*

0XOWLSODQH%DODQFLQJ

A method of balancing a machine that allows the measurement of the imbalance


weights at several planes along the shaft of the machine. Correction weights are
then added in each of these planes. Multiplane Balancing, as opposed to single
plane balancing, is usually required when a machine has several rotating elements, such as flywheels, tightly coupled on a shaft and closely spaced.
1RWHV

Specific observations that can be stored on the measurement point of a machine


along with the collected data.
These observations can be predefined notes from the MasterTrend database,
user defined notes that have been created via the keypad on the machinery analyzer, or a combination of the two methods.
2FWDYH

Method of measuring a signal by measuring the signal levels within a set of


bandpass filters that have a bandwidth of 1/3 octave.
2II5RXWH

A mode that allows the collection and storage of data on measurement points
that are not defined in the downloaded route.
2UGHUV

Multiples of machine turning speed (1xRPM, 2xRPM, 3xRPM, etc.).


3HDN

The largest signal level seen in a waveform over a period of time. For sinusoidal
signals, the peak signal level is always 1.414 times the RMS value of the signal
level. For non-sinusoidal signals, the peak level is often larger than the result
that this formula would produce.
3HDNWR3HDN

The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels over a period
of time. For a pure sinusoidal signal, the peak-to-peak level is two times the
peak signal level and 2.828 times the RMS value of the signal level. For nonsinusoidal signals, the peak-to-peak level is often larger than the result this formula would produce.

*

3HULRG

Time required to complete one cycle in a periodic signal.


3KDVH

1xRPM phase represents the location of the shaft of a machine in degrees (0 360) with respect to the tachometer pulse where the largest vibration occurs.
3ODQH

Designates one or more of the rotating elements of a machine that is to be balanced. Each plane lies perpendicular to the line that defines the axis of rotation.
3RLQW

Any location on a machine where measurements are made; used interchangeably with measurement point.
3RODU3ORW

A type of graph that displays data in polar coordinates.


3UHGLFWLYH0DLQWHQDQFH

Technology of periodically monitoring the actual condition of machines to discover faults, to determine probable time of breakdown, and to provide scheduled downtime for repair that avoids excess cost and lost production.
3ULQFLSDO6ORW3DVV

Principal slot pass (PSP) for electrical readings equals the number of rotor bars (or
stator slots) times running speed, minus line frequency ((#RBxSPEED)-LF)
5HDO7LPH

Continuously updated data or plot, such as an FFT spectrum.


506

The magnitude of a signal calculated or measured by the root mean square


method. Equal to 0.707 times the peak value for a pure sinusoidal signal.
5RXWH

One or more machines and their respective measurement points organized in an


efficient sequence for data collection.

*

530

Represents rotations per minute and is equal to 60 times frequency in Hz. Equivalent to CPM (cycles per minute).
56

A serial, synchronous communication standard; a type designation for cables


that are used to connect communications ports on host computer, analyzer, and
telephone modems.
6KDIW&XUUHQW9ROWDJH

Variations in electric motor air gaps, windings, and metal (rotor and frame)
result in a fluctuating magnetic field which is cut by conducting material, in this
case, the motor shaft. This condition gives rise to a current loop consisting of the
shaft, bearings, and casing which can damage the motor shaft and bearings.
6KDIW3UREH

This CSI device is used to acquire shaft current/voltage measurements on electric


motors.
6OLS6LGHEDQG

During each turn of an AC motors rotor, electrical signals associated with the rotor
induce currents in the stator windings. These currents appear as slip sidebands to
the supply line frequency peak. This frequency spectrum reflects the influence of
the motors load and response on the supply current. The sidebands are the result
of the slip frequency multiplied by the number of poles, and are referred to as
NPxSF.
The slip frequency is defined by:

6XEKDUPRQLFV

Vibration frequencies which are integer fractions of the running speed (example
1/2 RPM, 1/3 RPM, etc.) or some other fundamental frequency.

*

7DFKRPHWHU

Pulse signal used to measure shaft turning speed. This may also be used to synchronize the acquisition of dynamic data.
7UDQVLHQW

A non-steady-state signal of finite duration; often refers to a startup or coastdown of a machine.


7UHQG

Plotting a number of measurements of a parameter over time.


7ULJJHU

Causes the analyzer to start collection of data upon the receipt of a specified
dynamic signal from a sensor.
8QLIRUP:LQGRZ

Description of a uniformly weighted signal, where no special window shaping


is applied before frequency analysis. Sometimes used for collection of nonsteady-state data.
9HORFLW\

A measurement of the time rate of change in the displacement of an object.


Vibration is often measured in velocity using a velocity sensor. Velocity can be
measured also by integrating an accelerometer signal.
9LEUDWLRQ3DUDPHWHUV

From one to twelve frequency band-limited parameters which are measured


from the vibration signal. These parameters are defined in the analysis parameter set and are loaded into the machinery analyzer for each point from the AMS
Machinery Manager database. (Also called individual analysis parameters.)
9LVFRVLW\

Resistance of fluids to shearing effects; usually decreasing for liquids as the


temperature rises.
:DYHIRUP

Analog or digital representation of a signal or function displayed as amplitude


vs. time.

*

:LQGRZ

See Hanning Window and Uniform Window.

*

,QGH[

A
alarm
absolute 6-19
code 6-26, 6-27
data values 2-29
display 4-15, 5-31
dual upper 5-32, 6-22
envelope 5-28
flux elecrical condition 5-32
flux slot pass 5-32, 6-22
in window 5-32
maximum percent delta 5-33, 6-23
options 4-15, 5-31
overwrite 6-19
rotor bar 4-15, 5-31
temperature 6-12, 6-19
thresholds 6-24
alarms and faults
types posted 3-19
ambient temperature 6-4
analysis
excess amplitude 5-47
flux coil 5-18, 5-38 to 5-72
high frequency 5-57
frequency 5-45
full 5-23
high frequency 5-23, 5-57, 5-59
LF, RPS, PxS, SLIP 5-47
limit value 5-46
line freq amplitude 5-47
low frequency 5-40, 5-45
peak value 5-45
percent limit 5-46

quick evaluation 5-49


rotor bar 4-1 to 4-33, 5-18
supplemental 5-6
thermal/electrical 6-1 to 6-31
total peak amplitude 5-47
trend evaluation 5-52
variable frequency motor 4-18
analysis options 4-4 to 4-7, ?? to 5-20
analysis parameter set 2-11, 2-29

B
baseline 5-6
bearing failure 6-8
broken bars
severity 4-29

C
calculated delta 5-43
calibration 4-3, 5-6
different methods 3-16
case histories
bearing failure 6-8
increasing motor life 6-7
rotor bar 4-1
shorted winding turns 5-11, 5-15
voltage unbalance 5-7
communications cable 1-10
comparison
high frequency 5-59
low frequency 5-45
confidence factor 5-44
creating measurement points 2-1, 2-2
CSICOM C-3

,

CT ratio, permanent 2-17


current clamp sensitivity 2-17
current probe 4-20

D
data
between specified dates 4-6
exceptional 5-38
last survey only 4-6
latest available 4-6
noisy 5-4
database 2-1
automatic setup 2-12
creating 2-11
setting up 2-11
delta 4-29
delta, calculated 5-43
disclaimer 1-11
display
high frequency 5-59
rotor bar analysis 5-42
spectrum,flux coil 5-41
trend 5-65
display options 4-9 to 4-17, 5-22 to 5-35

E
electric current 1-8
endshield
aluminum 5-3
steel 5-3
expand A-2

F
fault frequencies 2-29
fault frequency 2-34
setup 2-34
fault frequency, clearing setup 2-29
faults

,

rotor 5-1, 5-5, G-6


rotor bar 4-1
stator 5-1, 5-5, G-6
stator short 5-15
stator shorts 5-11
flux 1-8
axial 5-1
electrical condition alarms 5-32
HFFLUX 2LF parameter 6-33
HFFLUX SPD parameter 6-33
low frequency analysis 5-40
measurement location 5-3
rotor bar alarms 4-15, 5-31, 6-20
rotor bar parameter 4-15, 5-31, 6-20, 6-32
slot pass 5-32, 6-22
spectrum 5-1
speed sideband alarms 6-21
speed sideband parameter 6-32
speed sidebands 5-53
flux coil
analysis 5-5
placement 5-3
frequency
lower sideband 4-2
supply line 4-1, 4-4, 5-18, 6-12
FRQCAL 2-5
full load RPM/RPS 3-15
function bar
Calibration 3-11
Initialize 3-16
No Change 3-15
Plot Setup 3-15
RPS vs RPM 3-15
Set RPM 3-8

G
global parameters 3-2
grid lines 6-17

ground cable 1-10


ground clamp C-4

H
HFD full scale range 2-33
HFFLUX 6-33
high frequency flux coil analysis 5-14

I
imbalance, current 4-11, 4-23, 4-24
increasing motor life 6-7

L
label
peaks 5-28
limit point IDs 5-19
load 6-13
load curve 3-11
low frequency analysis 5-40
low frequency flux analysis 5-40

M
machine 2-1
machinery analyzer 2-21, 4-20, 5-38
saving data 2-21
magnetic flux analysis 5-5
mandatory requirements 1-3
MasterTrend 2-11, 2-21
measured RPM/RPS 3-15
measurement auto-range 2-33
measurement location 4-20, 5-3, 6-2
measurement point 2-1, 4-5
ambient temperature 6-14
electric current 6-16
location and methods 5-3
proactive definition 2-13
setup 2-23

measurements
shaft probe C-4
misalignment 6-6
Model 341 Clamp-on Transformer 1-10
Model 342-C Cable 1-10
Model 343 Flux Coil 1-10, 5-1, 5-3
Model 348CI Communications Cable 1-10
Model 348GI Ground Cable 1-10
Model 348SP Shaft Probe 1-10
Model 505/510/515 Temperature Scanner
1-10
Model 901 Steel Sensor Pad 5-3
monitoring schedule 2-28
motor
analysis options 5-18
load curve 4-3
speed 4-3
variable frequency 4-18, 5-36
motor faults
analyzing 1-10
detecting 1-10
motor frequency data 2-5
FRQCAL 2-5
motor monitoring
electric current 1-8
flux 1-8, G-5
temperature 1-8
trend 1-9
motor temperature 6-4
motors
DC 2-7
increasing life 6-7
induction 2-7
synchronous 2-7
variable frequency 2-7
MotorView I 1-5, 4-1 to 4-33
MotorView II 1-5

,

N
noisy data 5-4
normalized temperature 6-5, 6-14
NPxSF
definition 4-2, G-10
lower sideband 4-11
sideband 3-9
sidebands 4-13
NPxSF sideband frequency 3-14
number of poles 2-8

temperature 6-18
trend 5-65
waveform 5-28
plotting full scale range 2-33
point
creating 2-1 to 2-22
shaft probe C-2
principle slot pass 2-22, 5-5, 5-14, G-6
print 4-6, 5-20
program disclaimer 1-11

overheating
bearing failure 6-1
excessive duty cycles 6-2
high ambient temperatures 6-2
poor air flow 6-1
power supply variations 6-2
restricted ventilation 6-2
rotor/stator degradation 6-1
single phasing 6-2

quick evaluation method 5-49, 5-62

P
parameter profile 4-33
parameter profile evaluation 5-71
peaks threshold 4-14
permanent CT ratio 2-17
plot
axis options 5-25
grid lines 4-14, 5-27
label peaks 4-14, 5-28
list peaks 4-14
mark NPxSF sidebands 4-13
multiple trend 6-17
peaks threshold 5-28
scale 5-25
slip x poles sidebands 5-27
spectrum 3-6

,

R
RBARS 6-32
reference measurement 5-6
reference spectrum 4-11
references 1-7
report
exceptional 5-38
exceptional data 6-16
exceptional rotor bar data 5-23
requirements 1-3
requirements, mandatory 1-3
rotor
faults 5-1
rotor bar
estimated broken bars 5-44
number of 5-17
rotor bar analysis 4-20
RPM of spectra 3-3
running speed 3-10, 5-1

S
search
database 5-19
equipment 5-19

high frequency 5-24, 6-15


route 5-19
spectrum 5-19
station 5-19
selecting speed 3-8
sensor pad 5-3
sensor sensitivity 2-31
shaft probe 1-10
calibration C-3
connections C-4
DC offset calibration C-3
DC offset ground clamp C-4
define points C-2
ground clamp C-4
short
stator 5-15
sideband 4-1, G-10
lower NPxSF 5-23
SPD 5-63
slip confidence 4-29
slip sidebands 4-2
slot pass
2xLF 5-63
family frequencies 2-22
principle 2-22
slot pass flux factor 3-3
slotpass
family 2-22
SPD sideband 5-63
SPDSB 6-32
special emphasis
caution 1-7
note 1-6
warning 1-7
spectrum
display 5-23
flux,typical 5-1
high frequency 5-5, 5-15, G-6
low frequency 5-5, 5-7, G-6

trending 5-14
voltage unbalance 5-8
speed
derived 5-24
speed selection 3-8
speed sideband 3-10
speed values 3-2
station 2-1
stator
faults 5-1
insulation breakdown 5-1
shorts 5-1
slots
number of 5-17
system requirements 1-10

T
temperature 1-8
alarms 6-19
ambient 6-4, 6-14
automatic data acquisition A-1
bearing 6-16
correction 6-5
coupling 6-6, 6-16
logging 6-7
measurement 6-16
measurements 6-2
Model 505 Probe A-1
Model 510 Probe A-1
motor 6-4
motor base 6-6
motor foot 6-6
normalize 6-5
normalized 6-5, 6-14
skin 6-4, 6-6, 6-16
solar heating 6-4
terminal 6-16
termination box 6-6

,

temperature measurement
ambient air 6-2
bearing 6-2
coupling 6-2
marking location 6-3
motor foot 6-2
skin locations 6-2
termination box 6-2
thermal parameter 6-5, 6-16
toolbar
display 3-7
transformer
permanently installed 1-4
voltage rating 1-4
trend
display 5-23
evaluation method 4-30, 5-52
high frequency 5-65 to 5-70
thermal/electrical 6-28 to 6-30
trend evaluation 4-30
trend evaluation method 5-65
turn-to-turn short 5-11, 5-15

U
unbalanced voltage 5-7
units
frequency axis 4-12

V
valid signal levels 2-33
variable frequency motors 5-36
voltage
unbalanced 5-7

W
waveform 4-14
waveform display 4-17, 5-35

,

You might also like